WO2020262134A1 - Purification method for actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device - Google Patents

Purification method for actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020262134A1
WO2020262134A1 PCT/JP2020/023711 JP2020023711W WO2020262134A1 WO 2020262134 A1 WO2020262134 A1 WO 2020262134A1 JP 2020023711 W JP2020023711 W JP 2020023711W WO 2020262134 A1 WO2020262134 A1 WO 2020262134A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
sensitive
radiation
site
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/023711
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
直紘 丹呉
慶 山本
惠瑜 王
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2021526829A priority Critical patent/JP7239695B2/en
Publication of WO2020262134A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020262134A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C25/00Compounds containing at least one halogen atom bound to a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C25/18Polycyclic aromatic halogenated hydrocarbons
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C381/00Compounds containing carbon and sulfur and having functional groups not covered by groups C07C301/00 - C07C337/00
    • C07C381/12Sulfonium compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D217/00Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems
    • C07D217/02Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with only hydrogen atoms or radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring; Alkylene-bis-isoquinolines
    • C07D217/08Heterocyclic compounds containing isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring systems with only hydrogen atoms or radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms, directly attached to carbon atoms of the nitrogen-containing ring; Alkylene-bis-isoquinolines with a hetero atom directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D285/00Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D275/00 - C07D283/00
    • C07D285/15Six-membered rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D295/00Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D295/22Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with hetero atoms directly attached to ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D295/26Sulfur atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D327/00Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D327/02Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms one oxygen atom and one sulfur atom
    • C07D327/04Five-membered rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D327/00Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D327/02Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms one oxygen atom and one sulfur atom
    • C07D327/06Six-membered rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D333/46Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings substituted on the ring sulfur atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D411/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D411/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D411/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D493/00Heterocyclic compounds containing oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system
    • C07D493/12Heterocyclic compounds containing oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D493/18Bridged systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/02Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/027Making masks on semiconductor bodies for further photolithographic processing not provided for in group H01L21/18 or H01L21/34

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a method for forming a pattern, and a method for producing an electronic device.
  • the resist for KrF excimer laser (248 nm) Since the resist for KrF excimer laser (248 nm), a pattern forming method using chemical amplification has been used to compensate for the decrease in sensitivity due to light absorption.
  • the photoacid generator contained in the exposed portion is decomposed by light irradiation to generate an acid. Then, it is contained in the actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as "resist composition") due to the catalytic action of the acid generated in the baking (PEB: Post Exposure Bake) process after exposure.
  • the solubility in the developing solution is changed by changing the alkali-insoluble group of the resin to the alkali-soluble group.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a pattern in which defects are suppressed.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method including a purification step based on the purification method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device using the pattern forming method.
  • the present inventors have completed the present invention as a result of diligent studies to solve the above problems. That is, it was found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
  • a method for purifying an active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing at least a resin whose polarity is increased by the action of an acid, a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation, and a solvent.
  • the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later.
  • a method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition which comprises step X of passing the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition through two or more types of filters and filtering the composition.
  • the actinic cheilitis or the actinic cheilitis resin composition is passed through two or more kinds of filters arranged in the flow path and filtered, and then the actinic cheilitis is passed through the filter.
  • the method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [4], which is a step X2 in which the radiation-sensitive resin composition is further guided to the same filter and filtered again. ..
  • the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition contains an organic solvent and contains The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [6], wherein the organic solvent for immersing the filter and the organic solvent contained in the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition are of the same type.
  • Purification method [8] A step of purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition by the method for purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [7].
  • a step of forming a resist film on a support using the purified actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition and The process of exposing the resist film and A pattern forming method comprising a step of developing the exposed resist film with a developing solution.
  • a method for manufacturing an electronic device which comprises the pattern forming method according to [8].
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a method for purifying a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a pattern in which defects are suppressed. Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pattern forming method including a purification step based on the purification method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device using the pattern forming method.
  • the description of the constituent elements described below may be based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • the notation without substitution and non-substituent includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent. To do.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the "organic group” in the present specification means a group containing at least one carbon atom. Unless otherwise specified, the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent.
  • the term “active light” or “radiation” refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X rays, and electron beams (EB). : Electron Beam) and the like.
  • light means active light or radiation.
  • exposure refers to not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also electron beams and It also includes drawing with particle beams such as ion beams.
  • "-" is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the bonding direction of the divalent groups described herein is not limited unless otherwise specified.
  • Y when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. Moreover, the said compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
  • (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acrylic represents acrylic and methacrylic
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin are GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC-8120GPC manufactured by Toso).
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) represents the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution, and specifically, using the following software package 1, a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values. The value based on is the value obtained by calculation. All the values of the acid dissociation constant (pKa) described in the present specification indicate the values calculated by using this software package.
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) can also be obtained by the molecular orbital calculation method.
  • a specific method for this there is a method of calculating by calculating H + dissociation free energy in an aqueous solution based on a thermodynamic cycle.
  • the calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated by, for example, DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature and are not limited to this. ..
  • DFT density functional theory
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in the present specification refers to a value obtained by calculating a value based on a database of Hammett's substituent constant and publicly known literature value using Software Package 1. If the acid dissociation constant (pKa) cannot be calculated by this method, the value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density general function method) shall be adopted.
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in the present specification refers to the "acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution” as described above, but when the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution cannot be calculated, , "Acid dissociation constant (pKa) in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) solution” shall be adopted.
  • examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention is a resin whose polarity is increased by the action of an acid (hereinafter, “acid-degradable resin” or “acid-degradable resin”).
  • acid-degradable resin or “acid-degradable resin”.
  • photoacid generator a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation
  • the present invention relates to a method for purifying a radioactive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”).
  • the first feature of the purification method of the present invention is that the photoacid generator is one or more photoacid generators selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later (hereinafter, "specific light”). It is also referred to as an "acid generator”).
  • the second characteristic point of the purification method of the present invention is that it includes a step X of passing the resist composition to be purified through two or more kinds of filters and filtering it.
  • the present inventors have a photoacid containing a polyvalent (for example, divalent) salt structure in the molecule, such as the photoacid generator represented by the above general formula (I) used in Patent Document 1.
  • the generator tends to form aggregates between the photoacid generators and / or with other compounding components due to the salt structure in the resist composition, and as a result, when a pattern is formed. It was found that many defects occur in the.
  • the present inventors have found that in a resist composition containing a specific acid generator, which is a photoacid generator containing a polyvalent salt structure in the molecule, the resist composition is used.
  • step X the amount of defects generated in the obtained pattern can be remarkably reduced by carrying out the step X of passing through two or more types of filters for filtration.
  • the mechanism of action is not clear, according to the above step X, the cohesiveness of the specific photoacid generator contained in the resist composition is relaxed, and as a result, the specific photoacid generators and / or the specific light are alleviated. It is presumed that this is because the formation of aggregates between the acid generator and other compounding components is suppressed.
  • the critical surface tension of the filter used in the above step X is preferably 10 to 90 din / cm.
  • the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters used in the step X is 40 to 90 din / cm (among others, the filter of at least one of the filters used in the step X
  • the critical surface tension is 40 to 90 dyne / cm and the critical surface tension of at least one filter is 10 to 39 dyne / cm)
  • the purification method of the present invention is the purification method T1 or the purification method T2 (preferably the purification method T3), the defect suppressing property of the obtained pattern is more excellent. ing.
  • step X included in the purification method of the present invention will be described below.
  • the step X is a step of passing the resist composition through two or more types of filters (hereinafter, also referred to as “filter X”) and filtering the resist composition.
  • filter X filters
  • filtration refers to the commonly used chemical “filtration”("a film or phase of a porous material is used to permeate only the phase [gas or liquid] of a fluid and is semi-solid. Separating a phase or solid from a fluid phase ”Chemical Encyclopedia 9 Published July 31, 1958 Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)
  • simply“ passing through a filter ” that is, separating a film or the like. It also includes the case where the semi-solid phase or solid trapped by the separating member cannot be visually confirmed by passing the member.
  • the resist composition to be passed through the filter may be a resist composition having the same concentration as the product, or a concept including a so-called "stock solution” having a relatively high solid content concentration before dilution.
  • stock solution having a relatively high solid content concentration before dilution.
  • two or more types of filters are intended to be filters with different surface critical tensions. That is, in step X, two or more types of filters having different surface critical tensions are used. Therefore, for example, other configurations such as the material and the pore diameter may be the same as long as the surface critical tension is different.
  • the structure of the filter X is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a film formed of a resin or the like (hereinafter, also referred to as “resin film”), and a resin film and a support member that supports the resin film. It may be composed of.
  • the material of the filter X is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include resins such as polyamide resin, polyolefin resin, and polyimide resin.
  • resins such as polyamide resin, polyolefin resin, and polyimide resin.
  • nylon nylon (nylons include nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 46, and the like) is preferable.
  • polyolefin resin polyethylene (PE) or polypropylene (PP) is preferable.
  • PP polypropylene
  • fluororesin PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) is preferable.
  • the filter X may be a resin film formed of a resin such as the above-mentioned lyamide resin, polyolefin resin, and polyimide resin, or may be composed of the above-mentioned resin film and a support member for supporting the above-mentioned resin film. It may be the one that has been made.
  • the pore size of the filter X is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of filtration efficiency, for example, 0.5 ⁇ m or less is preferable, 0.4 ⁇ m or less is more preferable, and 0.3 ⁇ m or less is further preferable.
  • the lower limit of the pore diameter is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 0.001 ⁇ m or more.
  • the "hole diameter" is intended to be the manufacturer's nominal diameter value.
  • critical surface tension as used herein is intended to be a manufacturer's nominal value. If there is no manufacturer's nominal value, water and iodomethane are used as measurement standard liquid substances, and the value measured by the above method is intended under the conditions of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a humidity of 40%.
  • the critical surface tension of the filter X is 10 to 90 din / cm
  • the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent for the following reasons.
  • the surface tension of an object passing through the filter is close to the critical surface tension of the filter, the object has a high affinity with the filter and tends to be easily adsorbed by the filter.
  • the surface tension of an object depends on the material. Only the desired object can be removed by a filter having a critical surface tension suitable for the surface tension peculiar to the material. More specifically, if a surfactant and bubbles are taken as an example, the surface tensions of the surfactant and the bubbles are different from each other.
  • the critical surface tension of the filter is removed from the applicable range of the surface tension of the surfactant and controlled so as to be compatible with the surface tension of the bubbles, only the bubbles can be adsorbed without adsorbing the surfactant.
  • the critical surface tension of the filter X is 10 to 90 dyne / cm (particularly, when the critical surface tension of the filter X is 40 to 90 dyne / cm)
  • the specific photoacid generator It is considered that the agglomerates are easily adsorbed by the filter X because they are compatible with the surface tension of the agglomerates caused by the above.
  • Examples of the filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 90 dyne / cm include a nylon film supported by a support member (critical surface tension: 77 dyne / cm), a nylon film alone (critical surface tension: 46 dyne / cm), and a support member.
  • Polyethylene membrane supported by critical surface tension: 36 dyne / cm
  • PTFE supported by supporting member critical surface tension: 28 dyne / cm
  • PTFE membrane alone critical surface tension: 18.5 dyne / cm
  • polyimide examples thereof include a single membrane (critical surface tension: 45 dyne / cm).
  • the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 dyne in that the agglomerates caused by the specific photoacid generator are easily adsorbed by the filter X and the defect suppression property of the formed pattern is more excellent. It is preferably / cm, and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 dyne / cm, and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 10 to 39 dyne / cm. Is more preferable. Further, in step X, when two or more types of filters satisfying the critical surface tension of 10 to 90 din / cm are used, the critical surface tension of the filter having the highest critical surface tension and the critical surface tension of the filter having the smallest critical surface tension are used. The difference from the above is preferably 8 dyne / cm or more. The upper limit of the difference is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 dyne / cm or less.
  • the number of filters X used in the step X is not particularly limited, but for example, two or more are preferable, and three or more are more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 10 or less is preferable, and 6 or less is more preferable.
  • the critical surface tensions of the other filters X may be the same or different as long as the critical surface tensions of two or more of the filters X used in the step X are different from each other.
  • step X The specific procedure of step X will be described below.
  • Step X is preferably carried out in a temperature environment of 15 to 25 ° C.
  • the differential pressure between the filters X is preferably 0.3 MPa or less, more preferably 0.2 MPa or less, and further preferably less than 0.1 MPa.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0 MPa can be mentioned.
  • the differential pressure between before the resist composition passes through the filter on the most upstream side and after passing through the filter on the most downstream side among the filters arranged in the flow path is 0.3 MPa or less. Is preferable, 0.2 MPa or less is more preferable, and less than 0.1 MPa is further preferable.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0 MPa can be mentioned.
  • Step X2 is preferable in that it is more excellent in defect suppression of the formed pattern.
  • Step X1 Single-passing type filtration step in which the resist composition is passed once through two or more types of filters X arranged in the flow path
  • Step X2 Resist composition through two or more types of filters X arranged in the flow path.
  • a circulating filtration step in which a resist composition that has passed through the filter X is further guided to the same filter and filtered again after passing through an object. That is, in step X1, two or more types of filters X are connected in series.
  • the step X2 is a circulation method in which the resist composition passing through the filter X is further guided to the same filter and circulated in the closed system. Applicable.
  • the step X1 may be repeated a plurality of times.
  • the number of cycles of the resist composition is, for example, 2 times or more, preferably 3 times or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15 times or less, preferably 10 times or less.
  • the purification method of the present invention preferably includes a step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X in an organic solvent before the step X in that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the organic solvent is not particularly limited, but is propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetic acid ester, butyl butyrate, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. And so on.
  • acetic acid ester methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferable.
  • alkoxypropionic acid ester methyl 3-methoxypropionate (MMP) or ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (EEP) is preferable.
  • Chain ketones include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl.
  • Ketones, acetylacetones, acetonylacetones, ionones, diacetonyl alcohols, acetylcarbinol, acetophenones, methylnaphthyl ketones, or methylamyl ketones are preferred.
  • the immersion time is not particularly limited, but 6 to 24 hours is preferable.
  • the temperature of the organic solvent during immersion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 15 to 25 ° C.
  • the organic solvent is preferably an organic solvent contained in the resist composition because it is more excellent in suppressing defects in the formed pattern. That is, it is preferable that the organic solvent for immersing the filter X and the organic solvent contained in the resist composition are of the same type.
  • step X is a schematic view of the apparatus used in step X.
  • the device of FIG. 2 is a device used when step X2 (circulation method) is carried out as step X.
  • the apparatus of FIG. 2 has three filters X (filters X4, X5, X6), one of the three filters X has a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 dyne / cm, and one is critical. The surface tension is 40 to 90 dyne / cm.
  • the tank 1, the pump 2, the column 400 in which the filter X4 is installed, the column 500 in which the filter X5 is installed, and the column 600 in which the filter X6 is installed are the flow paths 5, 6, 7, and 9. , And 10 are connected.
  • the flow path 7 is also connected to the tank 1, and by driving the pump 2, the resist composition contained in the tank 1 is circulated in the system.
  • a filling port 8 is installed in the flow path 7, and the resist composition that has undergone a predetermined circulation filtration step is filled in the treatment liquid filling container 4.
  • the filling port 8 is often closed at the start of driving the pump so that a predetermined number of circulations can be achieved. The number of circulations can be calculated using the flow meter 3 installed in the flow path 7.
  • step X when the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 din / cm and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 10 to 39 dyne / cm. It is preferable to arrange the filter having a critical surface tension of 40 to 90 din / cm on the upstream side of the filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm.
  • At least one of the filters X used in the step X is a filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm in that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent. At least one of the filters has a critical surface tension of 40 to 90 din / cm, and the following purification method T1 is used, or the following purification method T2 (preferably the following purification method T3) is preferable.
  • Purification method T1 A step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X1 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition, which comprises the step X1 (single flow type filtration step) and before the step X1 is carried out. Purification method to be carried out.
  • Purification method T2 A purification method including step X2 (circulation type filtration step).
  • Purification method T3 A step Y including step X2 (circulation type filtration step) and immersing the filter X used in step X2 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition is carried out before carrying out step X2. Purification method.
  • the resist composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific resist composition”) that is the subject of the purification method of the present invention includes a photoacid generator containing a specific photoacid generator, an acid-degradable resin (resin (A)), and Contains at least a solvent.
  • the specific resist composition may be a positive type resist composition or a negative type resist composition. Further, it may be a resist composition for alkaline development or a resist composition for organic solvent development.
  • the specific resist composition is typically a chemically amplified resist composition. In the following, first, various components of the specific resist composition will be described in detail.
  • the specific resist composition contains a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation.
  • the content of the photoacid generator (when a plurality of types are contained, the total content thereof) in the specific resist composition is preferably 1.0 to 30.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, it is 5.0 to 20.0% by mass.
  • the content of the photoacid generator here means, for example, that the photoacid generator contained in the specific resist composition is a photoacid generator other than the specific photoacid generator described later and the specific photoacid generator described later. In the case of two kinds of agents, the total content (mass%) of the specific photoacid generator and other photoacid generators is intended.
  • solid content in a resist composition is intended as a component forming a resist film, and does not contain a solvent. Further, if it is a component forming a resist film, even if its property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content.
  • the photoacid generator contains a compound (specific photoacid generator) selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later.
  • the content of the specific photoacid generator (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is preferably 1.0 to 20.0% by mass, preferably 2.0 to 15.0, based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferably by mass.
  • the specific photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the specific photoacid generator is a compound selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later. Hereinafter, compounds (I) to (III) will be described.
  • Compound (I) A compound having one of the following structural sites X and one of the following structural sites Y, and the following first acidic site and the following structure derived from the following structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation.
  • anionic part a 1 - consists of a cationic sites M 1 + and Table in HA 1 by and exposed to actinic rays or radiation the first structural portion structural site to form an acidic site Y that is: anionic part a 2 - a cationic sites M 2 + consists of a and by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, the formed by the above structural moiety X
  • the structural site forming the second acidic site represented by HA 2 having a structure different from that of the first acidic site.
  • the compound (I) satisfies the following condition I.
  • the compound PI in which the cation site M 1 + in the structure site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structure site Y are replaced with H + is contained in the structure site X.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 which is obtained by replacing the above-mentioned cation site M 1 + with H + , and the above-mentioned cation site M 2 + in the above structural site Y are replaced with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from an acidic moiety represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are obtained by the above-mentioned method. More specifically, the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PI refer to the compound PI (the compound PI is a compound having HA 1 and HA 2 ) when the acid dissociation constant of the compound PI is obtained. . corresponding to ”) is" a 1 - and pKa when a compound "having a HA 2 is the acid dissociation constant a1, the" a 1 - a compound having an HA 2 "is” a 1 - and a 2 - pKa when a compound "having a is an acid dissociation constant a2. Further, the compound PI corresponds to an acid generated by irradiating compound (I) with active light or radiation.
  • the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the upper limit of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15.0 or less.
  • the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, 6.5 or less, and 2.0 or less is preferable in that the stability of the cation moiety of the compound (I) in the resist composition is more excellent. , 1.0 or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, ⁇ 3.5 or higher, preferably ⁇ 2.0 or higher.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and even more preferably ⁇ 0.1 or less, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
  • M 11 + and M 12 + each independently represents an organic cation.
  • a 11 - and A 12 - independently represents an anionic functional group.
  • a 12 ⁇ represents a structure different from the anionic functional group represented by A 11 ⁇ .
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
  • Table above general formula (Ia) in M 11 + and M 12 + organic cation represented by made by replacing the H + compound PIa (HA 11 -L 1 -A 12 H), at A 12 H
  • the acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety to be produced is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by HA 11 .
  • the preferable values of the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are as described above.
  • a 11 - and A 12 - The anionic functional group represented by, for example, groups represented by the following general formula (B-1) ⁇ formula (B-13).
  • RX1 represents a substituent.
  • RX1 a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • a fluorine atom or a cyano group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as a substituent, it may be a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the carbon atom may be substituted with a carbonyl group.
  • RXF1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a perfluoroalkyl group. However, at least one of the plurality of RXF1 represents a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the perfluoroalkyl group represented by RXF1 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • RXF2 represents a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the perfluoroalkyl group represented by RXF2 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • a 11 - and A 12 - The combination of the anionic functional group represented by is not particularly limited, for example, A 11 - is a group represented by the general formula (B-8) or (B-10) If, A 12 - Table the anionic functional group represented by the general formula (B-1) ⁇ (B -7), (B-9), or (B-11) ⁇ (B -13) include groups, a 11 - when is a group represented by the general formula (B-7), a 12 - as the anionic functional group represented by the table in the general formula (B-6) The groups to be used are mentioned.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 is not particularly limited, and is -CO-, -NR-, -CO-, -O-, or an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms). 6. Linear or branched chain), cycloalkylene group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), divalent aliphatic heterocyclic group (at least one)
  • a 5- to 10-membered ring having an N atom, an O atom, an S atom, or a Se atom in the ring structure is preferable, a 5- to 7-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5- to 6-membered ring is further preferable), and a plurality of these.
  • Examples thereof include a divalent linking group in which The above R may be a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • the monovalent substituent is not particularly limited, but for example, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) is preferable.
  • These divalent linking groups may further include a group selected from the group consisting of -S-, -SO-, and -SO 2- .
  • the alkylene group, the cycloalkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the divalent aliphatic heterocyclic group may be substituted with a substituent.
  • the substituent include a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom).
  • organic cation represented by M 11 + and M 12 + are each independently formula (Zai) organic cation represented by (cation (Zai)) or the general formula organic cation (cation represented by (ZaII) (ZaII)) is preferable.
  • R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
  • the carbon number of the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is usually 1 to 30, preferably 1 to 20.
  • two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • the two of the group formed by bonding of the R 201 ⁇ R 203 for example, an alkylene group (e.g., butylene and pentylene), and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - is Can be mentioned.
  • the organic cation represented by the cation (ZaI-1), the cation (ZaI-2), and the general formula (ZaI-3b) (cation (ZaI-)) described later will be described.
  • Examples thereof include 3b)) and an organic cation (cation (ZaI-4b)) represented by the general formula (ZaI-4b).
  • the cation (ZaI-1) is an aryl sulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 of the above general formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
  • the aryl sulfonium cation all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or a part of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group and the rest may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom may be formed in the ring. It may contain an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • a group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 for example, one or more methylene groups are substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and / or a carbonyl group.
  • alkylene group e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, or -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -
  • aryl sulfonium cation examples include a triaryl sulfonium cation, a diallyl alkyl sulfonium cation, an aryl dialkyl sulfonium cation, a diallyl cycloalkyl sulfonium cation, and an aryl dicycloalkyl sulfonium cation.
  • aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
  • the aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include pyrrole residues, furan residues, thiophene residues, indole residues, benzofuran residues, benzothiophene residues and the like.
  • the aryl sulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as needed is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • Cycloalkyl group is preferable, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may independently have an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, carbon number of carbon atoms). 3 to 15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, and phenylthio groups. Be done.
  • the substituent may further have a substituent when possible, and for example, the alkyl group may have a halogen atom as a substituent and may be an alkyl halide group such as a trifluoromethyl group. ..
  • the cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom.
  • the organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 generally has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and are linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups, 2-oxocycloalkyl groups, or alkoxy groups.
  • a carbonyl methyl group is more preferred, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group is even more preferred.
  • Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group). Groups, butyl groups, and pentyl groups), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and norbornyl groups).
  • R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
  • the cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-3b).
  • R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
  • R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be combined to form a ring, respectively.
  • This ring may independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
  • the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic fused ring formed by combining two or more of these rings.
  • the ring include a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include an alkylene group such as a butylene group and a pentylene group.
  • the methylene group in the alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
  • a single bond or an alkylene group is preferable.
  • Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
  • the cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-4b).
  • R 13 is a group having a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be used, and a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). May be). These groups may have substituents.
  • R 14 is a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group having a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be a cycloalkyl group). It may be a group containing a part of). These groups may have substituents. When a plurality of R 14 are present, each independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
  • R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. These groups may have substituents.
  • Bonded to two R 15 each other may form a ring.
  • the ring skeleton may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, or a nitrogen atom.
  • two R 15 is an alkylene group, preferably bonded together to form a ring structure.
  • the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 are linear or branched chain.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group and the like are more preferable.
  • R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • aryl group of R 204 and R 205 a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like.
  • Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
  • Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
  • a butyl group or a pentyl group) or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent.
  • substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, 3 to 15 carbon atoms). 15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 15 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, phenylthio groups and the like can be mentioned.
  • Compound (II) A compound having two or more of the structural sites X and the structural site Y, and having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation. A compound that generates an acid containing the above and the second acidic moiety derived from the structural moiety Y. However, the compound (II) satisfies the following condition II. Condition II: In the compound (II), the compound PII obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + is contained in the structural site X.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + is replaced with H + , and the HA obtained by replacing the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety represented by 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are obtained by the above-mentioned method.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PII will be described more specifically.
  • compound (II) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one second acidic site derived from the structural site Y.
  • Compound PII corresponds to "a compound having two HA 1 and HA 2 ". If asked for the acid dissociation constant of the compound PII, compound PII is - a pKa of acid dissociation constant a1 when the "one of A 1 and one HA 1 and HA 2 with a compound of", “two a 1 - and HA 2 compound having the "is” two a 1 - and a 2 - pKa when a compound "having a is an acid dissociation constant a2.
  • the compound PII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic dissociation constant represented by HA 1 formed by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1.
  • compound PII corresponds to an acid generated by irradiating compound (II) with active light or radiation.
  • compound (II) may have a plurality of the structural sites Y.
  • the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the upper limit of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15.0 or less.
  • the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, 6.5 or less, and 2.0 or less is preferable in that the stability of the cation moiety of the compound (I) in the resist composition is more excellent. , 1.0 or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, ⁇ 3.5 or higher, preferably ⁇ 2.0 or higher.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and further preferably -0.1 or less in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
  • the compound (II) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a compound represented by the following general formula (IIa).
  • + M 21 + and M 22 each independently represents an organic cation.
  • a 21 - and A 22 - independently represents an anionic functional group.
  • a 22 ⁇ represents a structure different from the anionic functional group represented by A 21 ⁇ .
  • L 2 represents a (n1 + n2) valent organic group.
  • n1 represents an integer of 2 or more, and n2 represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • the following general formula (IIa) corresponds to the compound represented by Compound PIIa comprising replacing organic cation represented by M 21 + and M 22 + to H + (the general formula (IIa-1) ),
  • the acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety represented by A 22 H is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by HA 21 .
  • the preferable values of the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are as described above.
  • the (n1 + n2) valent organic group represented by L 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include groups represented by the following (A1) and the following (A2).
  • groups represented by the following (A1) and (A2) at least two of * A 21 - represents a bonding position to at least one of * the A 22 - represents a bonding site to the.
  • T 1 represents a trivalent hydrocarbon ring group or a trivalent heterocyclic group
  • T 2 is a carbon atom, a tetravalent hydrocarbon ring group, or a tetravalent. Represents the heterocyclic group of.
  • L 21 and L 22 independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, respectively.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 21 and L 22 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in the general formula (Ia), and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • n1 represents an integer of 2 or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 6 or less, preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 3 or less, preferably 2 or less.
  • Compound (III) A compound having two or more of the structural site X and the following structural site Z, wherein the first acidic site derived from the structural site X is 2 by irradiation with active light or radiation.
  • the nonionic organic moiety capable of neutralizing the acid in the structural moiety Z is not particularly limited, and for example, a moiety containing a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton (preferably organic). Site) is preferable.
  • a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether or a nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation is used. Examples thereof include functional groups having.
  • the nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
  • Substructures of functional groups having groups or electrons that can electrostatically interact with protons include, for example, crown ether structures, aza crown ether structures, 1-3 amine structures, pyridine structures, imidazole structures, and pyrazine structures. Etc., and among them, a primary to tertiary amine structure is preferable.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and further -0.1 or less in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. preferable.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
  • compound PIII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1. That is, when compound (III) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z, the compound PIII is "two HA 1". It corresponds to "a compound having.” If asked for the acid dissociation constant of the compound PIII, compound PIII is - pKa when the "one of A 1 and a compound having one HA 1" is an acid dissociation constant a1.
  • compound PIII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1.
  • the compound PIII in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + is, for example, a compound in which the compound (III) is represented by the compound (IIIa) described later. If, HA 31- L 3- N (R 2X ) -L 4- A 31 H corresponds.
  • the compound (III) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a compound represented by the following general formula (IIIa).
  • M 31 + A 31 - corresponds to the structural moiety X.
  • Compound (IIIa) produces an acid represented by HA 31- L 3- N (R 2X ) -L 4- A 31 H by irradiation with active light or radiation. That is, "M 31 + A 31 -” forms a first acidic moiety represented by HA 31.
  • M 31 + represents an organic cation.
  • a 31 - represents an anionic functional group.
  • L 3 and L 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group.
  • R 2X represents a monovalent substituent.
  • M 31 + and A 31 ⁇ are synonymous with M 11 + and A 11 ⁇ in the general formula (Ia) described above, respectively, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • L 3 and L 4 are synonymous with L 1 in the general formula (Ia) described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • two M 31 + each other, and two A 31 - each other represent each mutually identical groups.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R 2X is not particularly limited, and for example, -CH 2- is -CO-, -NH-, -O-, -S-,-. SO-, and -SO 2 - may be substituted with one or more combinations selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group (preferably may be 1-10 either linear or branched carbon atoms. ), Cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), alkenyl group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and the like. Further, the alkylene group, the cycloalkylene group, and the alkenylene group may be substituted with a substituent.
  • the molecular weight of the compounds represented by the compounds (I) to (III) is preferably 300 or more and less than 3000, more preferably 500 to 2000, and even more preferably 700 to 1500.
  • the content of the other photoacid generators is preferably 0.1 to 10.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the above other photoacid generators may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total content thereof is preferably within the above-mentioned suitable content range.
  • the specific resist composition contains a resin (hereinafter, also referred to as "acid-decomposable resin” or "resin (A)”) which is decomposed by the action of an acid to increase the polarity. That is, in the pattern forming method of the present invention, typically, when an alkaline developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed, and when an organic developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed. , A negative pattern is preferably formed.
  • the resin (A) usually contains a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid and whose polarity is increased (hereinafter, also referred to as “acid-degradable group”), and preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-degradable group refers to a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to form a polar group.
  • the acid-degradable group preferably has a structure in which the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid. That is, the resin (A) has a repeating unit having a group which is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group.
  • the polarity of the resin having this repeating unit is increased by the action of the acid, the solubility in the alkaline developer is increased, and the solubility in the organic solvent is decreased.
  • an alkali-soluble group is preferable, and for example, a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) methylene.
  • alkylsulfonyl alkylcarbonyl imide group
  • bis (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group bis (alkylcarbonyl) imide group
  • bis (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide group
  • tris alkylcarbonyl
  • Examples thereof include an acidic group such as a methylene group and a tris (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, and an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
  • a carboxyl group a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group is preferable.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), and alkenyl groups (straight chain). (Orchid or branched chain), or aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain)
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 preferably independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear alkyl group. Is more preferable.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be combined to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring.
  • an alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group is preferable. ..
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and a polycyclic ring such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. Cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • an aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
  • alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 a vinyl group is preferable.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferable as the ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 .
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl.
  • R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom and / or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group.
  • cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group for example, one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and / or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. May be good.
  • R 38 may be bonded to each other with another substituent contained in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding R 38 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
  • L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and an aryl group are combined).
  • M represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q is an alkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, a cycloalkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, an aryl group that may contain a hetero atom, an amino group, an ammonium group, a mercapto group, a cyano group, and an aldehyde.
  • the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group for example, one of the methylene groups may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • one of L 1 and L 2 is a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which an alkylene group and an aryl group are combined.
  • L 2 is preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group, and more preferably a tertiary alkyl group.
  • the secondary alkyl group include an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a norbornyl group
  • examples of the tertiary alkyl group include a tert-butyl group and an adamantan group.
  • Ar represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rn and Ar may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
  • Ar is more preferably an aryl group.
  • the ring member atom adjacent to the ring member atom directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • desorbing groups eliminated by the action of an acid include a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, and 1,1,4.
  • a cyclohexyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as 4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group may be used.
  • the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is also preferable.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom
  • R 1 is an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R 2 represents a desorbing group which is eliminated by the action of an acid and may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • at least one of L 1 , R 1 , and R 2 has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • the fluorine atom or a linking group may divalent have a iodine atom, -CO -, - O -, - S -, - SO -, - SO 2 -, have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom Examples thereof include a hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, etc.), and a linking group in which a plurality of these are linked.
  • the L 1, -CO-, or - arylene - fluorine atom or an alkylene group having iodine atom - are preferred.
  • the arylene group a phenylene group is preferable.
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched chain.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is not particularly limited, but 1 to 10 is preferable, and 1 to 3 is more preferable.
  • the total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms contained in the alkylene group having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 3 to 6.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but 1 to 10 is preferable, and 1 to 3 is more preferable.
  • the total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms contained in the alkyl group having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom other than the halogen atom.
  • R 2 represents a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid and may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • Rx 11 to Rx 13 are alkyl groups (linear or branched), fluorine atoms or iodine atoms which may independently have fluorine atoms or iodine atoms, respectively. It has a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic) that may have a fluorine atom or an alkenyl group that may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom (linear or branched chain), or a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic) which may be used.
  • Rx 11 to Rx 13 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 11 to Rx 13 are methyl groups.
  • Rx 11 to Rx 13 are the same as Rx 1 to Rx 3 in (Y1) and (Y2) described above, except that they may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and are an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • Alkyl group, and aryl group are the same as the definition and preferred range.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom in addition to the fluorine atom and the iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may be replaced with, for example, one of the methylene groups by a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group.
  • R 138 may be bonded to each other with another substituent contained in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding R 138 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
  • L 11 and L 12 may independently have a hydrogen atom; a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom; a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an alkyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of oxygen atoms; an aryl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom; or It represents a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group are combined, which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom).
  • M 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q 1 represents a fluorine atom, an alkyl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of iodine atoms and an oxygen atom; Yes fluorine atom, a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of iodine atoms and an oxygen atom May be cycloalkyl group; aryl group selected from the group consisting of fluorine atom, iodine atom and oxygen atom; amino group; ammonium group; mercapto group; cyano group; aldehyde group; or a group combining these (for example).
  • Ar 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • Rn 1 is an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • Rn 1 and Ar 1 may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
  • a repeating unit having an acid-degradable group a repeating unit represented by the general formula (AI) is also preferable.
  • Xa 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), alkenyl groups (linear or branched chain), or aryl (linear or branched chain). Represents a monocyclic or polycyclic) group. However, when all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups. Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic (monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group, etc.).
  • xa 1 Represented by xa 1, as the alkyl group which may have a substituent group, include groups represented by methyl group or -CH 2 -R 11.
  • R 11 represents a halogen atom (fluorine atom, etc.), a hydroxyl group, or a monovalent organic group.
  • the halogen atom may be substituted, an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms, or a halogen atom may be substituted.
  • Examples thereof include an acyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms and an alkoxy group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an alkyl group having 3 or less carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
  • Xa 1 a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a hydroxymethyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group of T include an alkylene group, an aromatic ring group, an -COO-Rt- group, and an -O-Rt- group.
  • Rt represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group.
  • T is preferably a single bond or a -COO-Rt- group.
  • Rt is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and is preferably a -CH 2- group,- (CH 2 ) 2- group, or- (CH 2 ) 3- group. Is more preferable.
  • an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group is preferable. ..
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. Cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • an aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
  • alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 a vinyl group is preferable.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group is preferable, and in addition, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, and the like.
  • Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a tetracyclododecanyl group and an adamantyl group are preferred. Of these, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a base. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group
  • Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
  • the substituents include, for example, an alkyl group (1 to 4 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group (1 to 4 carbon atoms), a carboxyl group, and an alkoxycarbonyl group (1 to 4 carbon atoms). Examples thereof include 2 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • the number of carbon atoms in the substituent is preferably 8 or less.
  • the repeating unit represented by the general formula (AI) is preferably an acid-decomposable (meth) acrylic acid tertiary alkyl ester-based repeating unit (Xa 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and T is a single bond. It is a repeating unit that represents.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group is preferably 15 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, still more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 80 mol% or less, more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less.
  • Xa 1 represents any of H, CH 3 , CF 3 , and CH 2 OH
  • Rxa and Rxb represent linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • the resin (A) may contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit described above.
  • the resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the following groups A and / or at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the following groups B. May be good.
  • Group A A group consisting of the following repeating units (20) to (29).
  • Repeating unit (29) The repeating unit B group represented by the formula (E), which will be described later: A group consisting of the following repeating units (30) to (32). (30) A repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group, which will be described later. (31) The alicyclic hydrocarbon structure described later. , Repetitive unit showing no acid decomposition property (32) A repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group, which will be described later.
  • the resin (A) When the specific resist composition is used as a resist composition for EUV, the resin (A) preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the above group A.
  • the resin (A) preferably contains at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom.
  • the resin (A) may have one repeating unit containing both a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, and the resin (A) may have one repeating unit. It may contain two kinds of a repeating unit having a fluorine atom and a repeating unit containing an iodine atom.
  • the resin (A) has a repeating unit having an aromatic group.
  • the resin (A) preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the above group B.
  • the resin (A) does not contain either a fluorine atom or a silicon atom.
  • the resin (A) does not have an aromatic group.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • an acid group having a pKa of 13 or less is preferable.
  • the acid group for example, a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, an isopropanol group and the like are preferable.
  • one or more (preferably one or two) fluorine atoms may be substituted with a group other than the fluorine atom (alkoxycarbonyl group or the like).
  • -C (CF 3 ) (OH) -CF 2- thus formed is also preferable as an acid group.
  • one or more of the fluorine atoms may be substituted with a group other than the fluorine atom to form a ring containing ⁇ C (CF 3 ) (OH) ⁇ CF 2- .
  • the repeating unit having an acid group includes a repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected by a leaving group desorbed by the action of the above-mentioned acid, and a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sulton group, or a carbonate group described later. Is preferably a different repeating unit.
  • the repeating unit represented by the formula (B) is preferable.
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • the fluorine atom or an organic group may monovalent optionally having iodine atom, a group represented by -L 4 -R 8 are preferred.
  • L 4 represents a single bond or an ester group.
  • R 8 is an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, Alternatively, a group combining these can be mentioned.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or an ester group.
  • L 3 represents a (n + m + 1) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or a (n + m + 1) -valent alicyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring group and a naphthalene ring group.
  • the alicyclic hydrocarbon ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and examples thereof include a cycloalkyl ring group.
  • R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group).
  • R 41 , R 42 and R 43 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • R 42 may be bonded to Ar 4 to form a ring, in which case R 42 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • X 4 represents a single bond, -COO-, or -CONR 64-
  • R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • L 4 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group, and represents an (n + 2) -valent aromatic ring group when combined with R 42 to form a ring.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the alkyl groups of R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 in the general formula (I) include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, and 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • An alkyl group having 20 or less carbon atoms such as an octyl group and a dodecyl group is preferable, an alkyl group having 8 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 3 or less carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • Preferred substituents in each of the above groups include, for example, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an amide group, a ureido group, a urethane group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a thioether group and an acyl group. , Achilloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, cyano group, and nitro group.
  • the substituent preferably has 8 or less carbon atoms.
  • Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group.
  • the divalent aromatic ring group when n is 1, for example, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a phenylene group, a trilene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group, or a thiophene ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, and the like.
  • a divalent aromatic ring group containing a heterocycle such as a benzothiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzopyrol ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a triazole ring, a thiaziazole ring, and a thiazole ring is preferable.
  • the aromatic ring group may have a substituent.
  • (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group when n is an integer of 2 or more, (n-1) arbitrary hydrogen atoms are removed from the above-mentioned specific example of the divalent aromatic ring group.
  • the group that consists of The (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
  • R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • the alkyl group for R 64 in, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, n- butyl group, sec Examples thereof include alkyl groups having 20 or less carbon atoms such as a butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, an octyl group, and a dodecyl group, and an alkyl group having 8 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
  • X 4 a single bond, -COO-, or -CONH- is preferable, and a single bond, or -COO- is more preferable.
  • the alkylene group for L 4, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as hexylene, and octylene group.
  • Ar 4 an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and a biphenylene ring group are more preferable.
  • the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I) preferably has a hydroxystyrene structure. That is, Ar 4 is preferably a benzene ring group.
  • A represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
  • R represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, and there are a plurality of them. In some cases, they may be the same or different. When it has a plurality of Rs, they may form a ring jointly with each other.
  • a hydrogen atom is preferable as R.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • b represents an integer from 0 to (5-a).
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • a represents 2 or 3.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 15 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 65 mol% or less, and even more preferably 60 mol% or less.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, in addition to the above-mentioned ⁇ repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and ⁇ repeating unit having an acid group >>.
  • the ⁇ repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom >> referred to here is a ⁇ repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group >>, ⁇ a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group >>, etc., which will be described later. It is preferably different from other types of repeating units belonging to group A.
  • the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) is preferable.
  • L 5 represents a single bond or an ester group.
  • R 9 represents an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R 10 may have an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, still more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, still more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom does not include ⁇ repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and ⁇ repeating unit having an acid group >>, the above-mentioned fluorine atom or iodine
  • the content of the repeating unit having an atom is also intended to be the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom excluding ⁇ repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and ⁇ repeating unit having an acid group >>.
  • the total content of the repeating units containing at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom is preferably 20 mol% or more, preferably 30 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A).
  • the above is more preferable, and 40 mol% or more is further preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 mol% or less.
  • repeating unit containing at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom for example, a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom and having an acid-degradable group, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and Repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom can be mentioned.
  • the resin (A) is a repeating unit having at least one selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group". It may also have). It is also preferable that the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group does not have an acid group such as a hexafluoropropanol group.
  • the lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure.
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure.
  • a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure in which another ring structure is fused to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure.
  • a structure in which another ring structure is fused is more preferable.
  • the resin (A) has a lactone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a table represented by any of the following general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). It is preferable to have a repeating unit having a lactone group or a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure. Further, a lactone group or a sultone group may be directly bonded to the main chain. For example, a ring-membered atom of a lactone group or a sultone group may form the main chain of the resin (A).
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure portion may have a substituent (Rb 2 ).
  • Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. , Halogen atom, hydroxyl group, cyano group, acid-degradable group and the like.
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, Rb 2 existing in plural numbers may be different or may be bonded to form a ring Rb 2 between the plurality of.
  • It has a group having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) or a sultone structure represented by any of the general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3).
  • Examples of the repeating unit include a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (AI).
  • Rb 0 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Preferred substituents that the alkyl group of Rb 0 may have include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom. Examples of the halogen atom of Rb 0 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. Rb 0 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Ab is a divalent linking group having a single bond, an alkylene group, a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, or a divalent group combining these. Represent. Of these, a single bond or a linking group represented by -Ab 1- CO 2- is preferable.
  • Ab 1 is a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, and a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, an adamantylene group, or a norbornene group is preferable.
  • V is a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-1). It represents a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of SL1-3).
  • any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more.
  • a cyclic carbonate group is preferable.
  • a repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate group a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A-1) is preferable.
  • RA 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic group (preferably a methyl group).
  • n represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
  • R A 2 represents a substituent. when n is 2 or more, R A 2 existing in plural, may each be the same or different.
  • A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, or a divalent combination thereof. Group is preferred.
  • Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring with a group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula.
  • the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group is illustrated below.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, further preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as “photoacid generating group”) as a repeating unit other than the above.
  • the repeating unit having this photoacid generating group corresponds to a compound (also referred to as “photoacid generator”) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation described later.
  • Examples of such a repeating unit include a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (4).
  • R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L 42 represents a divalent linking group.
  • R 40 represents a structural site that is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to generate an acid in the side chain.
  • the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is illustrated below.
  • examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (4) include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP-A-2014-041327.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (V-1) or the following general formula (V-2).
  • the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (V-1) and the following general formula (V-2) is preferably a repeating unit different from the above-mentioned repeating unit.
  • R 6 and R 7 independently have a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR:
  • R is the number of carbon atoms. 1 to 6 alkyl groups or fluorinated alkyl groups), or carboxyl groups.
  • As the alkyl group a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • n 3 represents an integer from 0 to 6.
  • n 4 represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • X 4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the repeating unit represented by the general formula (V-1) or (V-2) is illustrated below.
  • the resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid or pattern disintegration during development.
  • Tg is preferably greater than 90 ° C, more preferably greater than 100 ° C, even more preferably greater than 110 ° C, and particularly preferably greater than 125 ° C.
  • Tg is preferably 400 ° C. or lower, more preferably 350 ° C. or lower.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer such as the resin (A) is calculated by the following method.
  • the Tg of a homopolymer composed of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method.
  • the calculated Tg is referred to as "repeating unit Tg".
  • the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all the repeating units in the polymer is calculated.
  • Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using Fox's formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and the sum of them is used as the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
  • the Bicerano method is described in the Precision of developers, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993) and the like. Further, the calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using the polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
  • the resin (A) preferably has a repeating unit in which the Tg of the homopolymer is 130 ° C. or higher.
  • the type of repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher calculated by the Bicerano method may be used.
  • the homopolymer corresponds to the repeating unit having a Tg of 130 ° C. or higher.
  • Formulas (A) and RA represent groups having a polycyclic structure.
  • R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • the group having a polycyclic structure is a group having a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include the following repeating units.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • Ra is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'''.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R'and R'' are independently alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, alkenyl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, asyloxy groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, amino groups, halogen atoms, respectively.
  • R ′′ is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxyl group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'and R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a plurality of these.
  • Examples thereof include linked linking groups.
  • m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are often 2 or less and more often 1 or less.
  • R b1 to R b4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
  • the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
  • at least two or more organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (B) include the following repeating units.
  • R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
  • R' is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'.
  • R' represents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms) or a carboxyl group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • R c1 to R c4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 is a hydrogen-bonding hydrogen within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon. It is a group having an atom. Among them, in order to induce the interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen-bonding hydrogen atoms within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (C) include the following repeating units.
  • R represents an organic group.
  • the organic group may have a substituent, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR:
  • R is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Alternatively, an alkyl fluorinated group) and the like can be mentioned.
  • R' represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom in the organic group may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • cylic represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure.
  • the number of constituent atoms of the ring is not particularly limited.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (D) include the following repeating units.
  • R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, respectively.
  • An ester group (-OCOR “or -COOR”: R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxyl group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R' is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom and an ester group.
  • R is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like, which may have a substituent.
  • Cylic is a cyclic group containing a carbon atom in the main chain. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (E) include the following repeating units.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R' is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group.
  • R is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • the two Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (E) is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 55 mol% or less.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
  • Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group contained in the resin (A) include the repeating unit described in the above-mentioned ⁇ Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group >>.
  • the preferable content is also as described in ⁇ Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group >> described above.
  • R 1c represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group or a hydrochimethyl group.
  • R 2c to R 4c independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. However, at least one of R 2c to R 4c represents a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
  • one or two of R 2c to R 4c are hydroxyl groups and the rest are hydrogen atoms. More preferably, two of R 2c to R 4c are hydroxyl groups, and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group are given below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
  • the alkali-soluble group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bisulsulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol in which the ⁇ -position is substituted with an electron-withdrawing group (for example, a hexafluoroisopropanol group). Is preferable.
  • the resin (A) contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, the resolution in contact hole applications is increased.
  • the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group includes a repeating unit in which an alkali-soluble group is directly bonded to the main chain of the resin, such as a repeating unit made of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, or an alkali on the main chain of the resin via a linking group. Repeat units to which soluble groups are attached can be mentioned.
  • the linking group may have a monocyclic or polycyclic cyclic hydrocarbon structure.
  • a repeating unit made of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid is preferable.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more, still more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the upper limit is preferably 20 mol% or less, more preferably 15 mol% or less, still more preferably 10 mol% or less.
  • Rx represents H, CH 3 , CH 2 OH or CF 3 .
  • repeating unit having at least one kind selected from a lactone group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group a repeating unit having at least two selected from a lactone group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group is preferable.
  • a repeating unit having a cyano group and a lactone group is more preferable, and a repeating unit having a structure in which a cyano group is substituted with a lactone structure represented by the general formula (LC1-4) is further preferable.
  • the resin (A) may have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and may have a repeating unit that does not exhibit acid degradability.
  • a repeating unit include a repeating unit derived from 1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, diamantyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • R 5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or -CH 2 -O-Ra 2 group.
  • Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group.
  • the cyclic structure of R 5 includes a monocyclic hydrocarbon group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon group.
  • the monocyclic hydrocarbon group include a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon group include a ring-aggregated hydrocarbon group and a crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon group.
  • Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring also includes a fused ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
  • crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon group a norbornyl group, an adamantyl group, a bicyclooctanyl group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2,6 ] decanyl group is preferable, and a norbonyl group or an adamantyl group is more preferable.
  • the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group protected by a protective group, and an amino group protected by a protective group.
  • a halogen atom a bromine atom, a chlorine atom, or a fluorine atom is preferable.
  • the alkyl group a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, or a t-butyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group protected by a protective group, and an amino group protected by a protective group.
  • a 1-ethoxyethyl group or a 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl group is preferable.
  • the acyl group an aliphatic acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a formyl group, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a valeryl group, and a pivaloyl group is preferable.
  • an alkoxycarbonyl group an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group, is preferably 0 to 40 mol%, preferably 0 to 20 mol%, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). More preferably mol%.
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (III) are given below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Ra represents H, CH 3 , CH 2 OH, or CF 3 .
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit described above.
  • the resin (A) has a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxatian ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantin ring group. You may be doing it. Such repeating units are illustrated below.
  • the resin (A) has various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, standard developer suitability, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, and the like. You may be doing it.
  • all the repeating units are composed of (meth) acrylate-based repeating units.
  • all the repeating units are methacrylate-based repeating units
  • all the repeating units are acrylate-based repeating units
  • all the repeating units are either methacrylate-based repeating units or acrylate-based repeating units. It can be used, and the acrylate-based repeating unit is preferably 50 mol% or less of all the repeating units.
  • the content of the resin (A) is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the solid content is intended to be a component in the composition excluding the solvent, and any component other than the solvent is regarded as a solid content even if it is a liquid component.
  • the resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the specific resist composition may further contain an acid diffusion control agent.
  • the acid diffusion control agent acts as a quencher that traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator or the like at the time of exposure and suppresses the reaction of the acid-degradable resin in the unexposed portion due to the excess generated acid.
  • the acid diffusion control agent includes, for example, a basic compound (DA), a basic compound (DB) whose basicity is reduced or eliminated by irradiation with active light or radiation, and a nitrogen atom, which is eliminated by the action of an acid.
  • a low molecular weight compound (DD) having a group, an onium salt compound (DE) having a nitrogen atom in the cation portion, and the like can be used as an acid diffusion control agent.
  • a known acid diffusion control agent can be appropriately used.
  • paragraphs [0627] to [0664] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1 paragraphs [0995] to [0187] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0004544A1, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0237190A1.
  • Known compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0403] to [0423] of the specification and paragraphs [0259] to [0328] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0274458A1 can be suitably used as the acid diffusion control agent.
  • Base compound (DA) As the basic compound (DA), compounds having a structure represented by the following formulas (A) to (E) are preferable.
  • R 200 , R 201 and R 202 may be the same or different, and each independently has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl. Represents a group (6 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • R 201 and R 202 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • R 203 , R 204 , R 205 and R 206 may be the same or different, and each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl groups in the general formulas (A) and (E) may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • the alkyl group having a substituent an aminoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyanoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable. It is more preferable that the alkyl groups in the general formulas (A) and (E) are unsubstituted.
  • guanidine As the basic compound (DA), guanidine, aminopyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, aminomorpholin, aminoalkylmorpholin, or piperidine are preferable, and imidazole structure, diazabicyclo structure, onium hydroxide structure, onium carboxylate structure, and tri.
  • a compound having an alkylamine structure, an aniline structure or a pyridine structure, an alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond, or an aniline derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond is more preferable.
  • a basic compound (DB) whose basicity is reduced or eliminated by irradiation with active light or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as “compound (DB)”) has a proton acceptor functional group and is active light or radiation. It is a compound whose proton acceptor property is reduced or eliminated, or changes from proton acceptor property to acidity by being decomposed by irradiation with.
  • a proton-accepting functional group is a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton, for example, a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a ⁇ -conjugated group. It means a functional group having a nitrogen atom with an unshared electron pair that does not contribute.
  • the nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
  • Preferred partial structures of the proton acceptor functional group include, for example, a crown ether structure, an aza crown ether structure, a primary to tertiary amine structure, a pyridine structure, an imidazole structure, and a pyrazine structure.
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) of the compound generated by decomposing the compound (DB) by irradiation with active light or radiation preferably satisfies pKa ⁇ -1, and more preferably -13 ⁇ pKa ⁇ -1. , -13 ⁇ pKa ⁇ -3 is more preferable.
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) can be obtained by the method described above.
  • a low molecular weight compound (DD) having a nitrogen atom and having a group eliminated by the action of an acid has a group desorbed by the action of an acid on the nitrogen atom. It is preferably an amine derivative.
  • an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group, or a hemiaminol ether group is preferable, and a carbamate group or a hemiaminol ether group is more preferable. ..
  • the molecular weight of the compound (DD) is preferably 100 to 1000, more preferably 100 to 700, and even more preferably 100 to 500.
  • Compound (DD) may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on the nitrogen atom.
  • the protecting group constituting the carbamate group is represented by the following general formula (d-1).
  • R b is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms), and an alkoxy group. It represents (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms) or an alkoxyalkyl group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms). R b may be connected to each other to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group represented by Rb are independently functional groups such as hydroxyl groups, cyano groups, amino groups, pyrrolidino groups, piperidino groups, morpholino groups, and oxo groups, and alkoxy groups. Alternatively, it may be substituted with a halogen atom. The same applies to the alkoxyalkyl group indicated by R b .
  • R b a linear or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group is more preferable.
  • the ring formed by connecting the two R bs to each other include an alicyclic hydrocarbon, an aromatic hydrocarbon, a heterocyclic hydrocarbon, and a derivative thereof.
  • Specific structures of the group represented by the general formula (d-1) include, but are not limited to, the structure disclosed in paragraph [0466] of US Patent Publication US2012 / 0135348A1.
  • l represents an integer of 0 to 2
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 3
  • Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group.
  • the two Ras may be the same or different, and the two Ras may be interconnected to form a heterocycle with the nitrogen atom in the equation. This heterocycle may contain a heteroatom other than the nitrogen atom in the formula.
  • R b has the same meaning as R b in formula (d-1), and preferred examples are also the same.
  • alkyl group as R a a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group and aralkyl group, each independently, alkyl group as R b, cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups, is replaced
  • the group may be substituted with a group similar to the group described above.
  • alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group of Ra are the same groups as those described above for R b.
  • a particularly preferred compound (DD) in the present invention include, but are not limited to, the compounds disclosed in paragraph [0475] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/01335348A1.
  • the onium salt compound (DE) having a nitrogen atom in the cation part is preferably a compound having a basic moiety containing a nitrogen atom in the cation portion.
  • the basic moiety is preferably an amino group, more preferably an aliphatic amino group. It is more preferable that all the atoms adjacent to the nitrogen atom in the basic moiety are hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms.
  • an electron-attracting functional group (carbonyl group, sulfonyl group, cyano group, halogen atom, etc.) is not directly bonded to the nitrogen atom.
  • an electron-attracting functional group carbonyl group, sulfonyl group, cyano group, halogen atom, etc.
  • compound (DE) include, but are not limited to, the compound disclosed in paragraph [0203] of US Patent Application Publication 2015/0309408A1.
  • a preferable example of the acid diffusion control agent is shown below.
  • the content of the acid diffusion control agent (the total of multiple types, if present) is 0.1 to 11.0 with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the mass% is preferable, 0.1 to 10.0 mass% is more preferable, 0.1 to 8.0 mass% is further preferable, and 0.1 to 5.0 mass% is particularly preferable.
  • one type of acid diffusion control agent may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the specific resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A) in addition to the resin (A).
  • Hydrophobic resins are preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike surfactants, they do not necessarily have to have hydrophilic groups in the molecule, and polar and non-polar substances are uniformly mixed. It does not have to contribute to doing so.
  • the effects of adding the hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angles of the resist film surface with respect to water, and suppressing outgas.
  • Hydrophobic resin from the viewpoint of uneven distribution in the film surface layer, "fluorine atom", “silicon atom”, and to have any one or more "CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin” Is preferable, and it is more preferable to have two or more kinds. Further, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain.
  • the fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms in the hydrophobic resin may be contained in the main chain of the resin and may be contained in the side chains. You may.
  • the partial structure having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, a cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom, or an aryl group having a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) is a linear or branched alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom. Further, it may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom.
  • the cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom is a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom, and may further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
  • the aryl group having a fluorine atom include those in which at least one hydrogen atom of an aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, and even if the aryl group has a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
  • Examples of repeating units having a fluorine atom or a silicon atom include those exemplified in paragraph [0519] of US2012 / 0251948A1.
  • the hydrophobic resin may also preferably comprise a CH 3 partial structure side chain moiety.
  • CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion in the hydrophobic resin are those containing CH 3 partial structure ethyl, and propyl groups and the like have.
  • the methyl group directly bonded to the main chain of the hydrophobic resin (for example, the ⁇ -methyl group of the repeating unit having a methacrylic acid structure) contributes to the uneven distribution of the surface of the hydrophobic resin due to the influence of the main chain. small order shall not be included in the CH 3 partial structures in the present invention.
  • the resins described in JP-A-2011-24801, JP-A-2010-175859, and JP-A-2012-032544 can also be preferably used.
  • a preferable example of the monomer corresponding to the repeating unit constituting the hydrophobic resin is shown below.
  • the specific resist composition may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant By containing a surfactant, it is possible to form a pattern having better adhesion and fewer development defects.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant and / or a silicon-based surfactant is preferable. Fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants include, for example, the surfactants described in paragraph [0276] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425.
  • Ftop EF301 or EF303 (manufactured by Shin-Akita Kasei Co., Ltd.); Florard FC430, 431 or 4430 (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.); Megafuck F171, F173, F176, F189, F113, F110, F177, F120 or R08 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.); Surflon S-382, SC101, 102, 103, 104, 105 or 106 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.); Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.); GF-300 or GF-150 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-393 (manufactured by Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.); EFTOP EF121, EF122A, EF122B, RF122C, EF125M, EF135M, EF351,
  • the polymer having a fluoroaliphatic group a copolymer of a monomer having a fluoroaliphatic group and (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylate and / or (poly (oxyalkylene)) methacrylate is preferable, and the polymer is irregularly distributed. It may be a block copolymerized product.
  • the poly (oxyalkylene) group include a poly (oxyethylene) group, a poly (oxypropylene) group, and a poly (oxybutylene) group, and poly (oxyethylene, oxypropylene, and oxyethylene).
  • the copolymer of the monomer having a fluoroaliphatic group and the (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylate (or methacrylate) is not only a binary copolymer, but also a monomer having two or more different fluoroaliphatic groups.
  • a ternary or higher copolymer obtained by simultaneously copolymerizing two or more different (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylates (or methacrylates) or the like may be used.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the specific resist composition contains a solvent.
  • Solvents include (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate, butyl butyrate, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of carbonates.
  • the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
  • the present inventors have found that when such a solvent is used in combination with the above-mentioned resin (A), the coatability of the composition is improved and a pattern having a small number of development defects can be formed. .. The reason is not always clear, but since these solvents have a good balance of solubility, boiling point and viscosity of the resin (A) described above, uneven film thickness of the composition film and generation of precipitates in spin coating, etc. The present inventors believe that this is due to the ability to suppress.
  • component (M1) one or more selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate is preferable, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (Ppropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate).
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Ppropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • the components (M2) are preferably as follows.
  • propylene glycol monoalkyl ether propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) or propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE) is preferable.
  • lactate ester ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, or propyl lactate is preferable.
  • acetic acid ester methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferable.
  • methyl 3-methoxypropionate MMP: methyl 3-methoxypropionate
  • ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate
  • Chain ketones include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl.
  • Ketones acetylacetones, acetonylacetones, ionones, diacetonyl alcohols, acetylcarbinol, acetophenones, methylnaphthyl ketones, or methylamyl ketones are preferred.
  • cyclic ketone methylcyclohexanone, isophorone, or cyclohexanone is preferable.
  • lactone ⁇ -butyrolactone is preferable.
  • alkylene carbonate propylene carbonate is preferable.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether PGME
  • ethyl lactate ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate
  • methylamyl ketone cyclohexanone
  • butyl acetate pentyl acetate
  • ⁇ -butyrolactone propylene carbonate
  • an ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14, more preferably 7 to 12 and even more preferably 7 to 10) and having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
  • Ester-based solvents having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms include amyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, butyl propionate, and isobutyl isobutyrate. , Heptyl propionate, or butyl butate is preferred, and isoamyl acetate is more preferred.
  • the component (M2) preferably has a flash point (hereinafter, also referred to as fp) of 37 ° C. or higher.
  • fp flash point
  • Examples of such a component (M2) include propylene glycol monomethyl ether (fp: 47 ° C.), ethyl lactate (fp: 53 ° C.), ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (fp: 49 ° C.), and methylamyl ketone (fp: 42 ° C.).
  • °C cyclohexanone
  • fp: 44 ° C pentyl acetate
  • fp: 45 ° C methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate
  • ⁇ -butyrolactone fp: 101 ° C
  • propylene carbonate fp: 132 ° C.
  • °C propylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethyl lactate, pentyl acetate, or cyclohexanone is more preferable, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether or ethyl lactate is even more preferable.
  • the "flash point” means a value described in the reagent catalog of Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. or Sigma-Aldrich Co., Ltd.
  • the mass ratio (M1 / M2) of the mixture of the component (M1) and the component (M2) in the mixed solvent is preferably in the range of "100/0" to "15/85", and is preferably "100/0". More preferably, it is in the range of "40/60".
  • the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
  • the content of the components other than the components (M1) and (M2) is preferably in the range of 30% by mass or less and more preferably in the range of 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
  • the specific resist composition further contains a resin other than those described above, a cross-linking agent, an acid growth agent, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, an alkali-soluble resin, a dissolution inhibitor, a dissolution accelerator and the like. You may be.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention includes the following steps 1 to 4.
  • Step 1 Purify the resist composition by the purification method of the present invention
  • Step 2 Form a resist film on the support (on the substrate) using the purified resist composition
  • Step 3 Expose the resist film
  • Step 4 Step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern
  • Step 1; Purification step The purification method of the present invention is as described above. Further, as the resist composition, a resist composition can be used. The specific resist composition is as described above.
  • the content of metal atoms in the resist composition include a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials in the resist composition, and various materials in the composition. Examples thereof include a method of filtering the constituent raw materials with a filter, and a method of distilling under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
  • a method for reducing the content of metal atoms in the composition there is also a method of removing the resist composition with an adsorbent.
  • a known adsorbent can be used.
  • an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used.
  • an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite
  • an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon
  • the inside of the resist composition manufacturing apparatus is gas-replaced with an inert gas such as nitrogen.
  • an inert gas such as nitrogen.
  • the specific resist composition undergoes various purifications and then is filled in a clean container.
  • the composition filled in the container is preferably stored refrigerated. As a result, performance deterioration over time is suppressed.
  • the shorter the time from the completion of filling the composition into the container to the start of refrigerated storage the more preferably, generally within 24 hours, preferably within 16 hours, more preferably within 12 hours, and 10 Within hours is even more preferred.
  • the storage temperature is preferably 0 to 15 ° C, more preferably 0 to 10 ° C, and even more preferably 0 to 5 ° C.
  • Examples of the method of forming a resist film on a substrate using the resist composition include a method of applying the resist composition on the substrate.
  • the resist composition can be applied onto a substrate (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coating) such as that used in the manufacture of integrated circuit elements by an appropriate coating method such as a spinner or coater.
  • a coating method spin coating using a spinner is preferable.
  • the rotation speed at the time of spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
  • the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. If necessary, various undercoat films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
  • Examples of the drying method include a method of heating and drying.
  • the heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be performed by using a hot plate or the like.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, still more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
  • the film thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but 10 to 150 nm is preferable, and 15 to 100 nm is more preferable, from the viewpoint of forming a fine pattern with higher accuracy.
  • a top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film by using the top coat composition. It is preferable that the topcoat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film. Further, it is preferable to dry the resist film before forming the top coat. Next, the topcoat composition can be formed on the obtained resist film by applying the topcoat composition on the obtained resist film by the same means as the method for forming the resist film and further drying.
  • the film thickness of the top coat is preferably 10 to 200 nm, more preferably 20 to 100 nm.
  • the topcoat composition contains, for example, a resin, an additive and a solvent. As the resin, the same resin as the hydrophobic resin described above can be used.
  • the content of the resin is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.7% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
  • the acid diffusion control agent described above can be used.
  • a compound having a radical trap group such as a compound having an N-oxyl-free radical group can also be used. Examples of such a compound include [4- (benzoyloxy) -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidinooxy] radicals.
  • the content of the additive is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
  • the solvent preferably does not dissolve the resist film, for example, an alcohol solvent (4-methyl-2-pentanol, etc.), an ether solvent (diisoamyl ether, etc.), an ester solvent, a fluorine solvent, and a hydrocarbon. Examples thereof include hydrogen-based solvents (n-decane and the like).
  • the content of the solvent in the topcoat composition is preferably set so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
  • the top coat composition may contain a surfactant in addition to the above-mentioned additives, and as the above-mentioned surfactant, a surfactant which may be contained in the composition of the present invention can be used.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
  • the top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method. For example, based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP-A-2014-059543. Can form a top coat. For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound as described in JP2013-61648A on the resist film. Specific examples of basic compounds that can be contained in the top coat include basic compounds that may be contained in the composition of the present invention.
  • the top coat preferably contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond and an ester bond.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, still more preferably 30 to 120 seconds.
  • the heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be performed by using a hot plate or the like. This process is also called post-exposure baking.
  • Step 4 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern.
  • a developing method a method of immersing the substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method of raising the developing solution on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and allowing it to stand still for a certain period of time (paddle method).
  • a method of spraying the developer on the surface of the substrate spray method
  • a method of continuing to eject the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic discharge method).
  • a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting with another solvent.
  • the development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed portion is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developing solution is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
  • the developing solution examples include an alkaline developing solution and an organic solvent developing solution.
  • the alkaline developer it is preferable to use an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali.
  • the type of alkaline aqueous solution is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, a cyclic amine, and the like.
  • An alkaline aqueous solution can be mentioned.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH).
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • An appropriate amount of alcohols, surfactants and the like may be added to the alkaline developer.
  • the alkali concentration of the alkaline developer is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the pH of the alkaline developer is usually 10.0 to 15.0.
  • the organic solvent developer is a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • the vapor pressure of the organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developer (in the case of a mixed solvent, the vapor pressure as a whole) is preferably 5 kPa or less, more preferably 3 kPa or less, and further preferably 2 kPa or less at 20 ° C.
  • Examples of the organic solvent used in the organic solvent developing solution include known organic solvents, and examples thereof include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents.
  • the organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developing solution has 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14 and 7 to 14) from the viewpoint that swelling of the resist film can be suppressed when EUV and an electron beam are used in the exposure step. 12 is more preferable, and 7 to 10 is more preferable), and it is preferable to use an ester solvent having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
  • the hetero atom of the ester-based solvent is an atom other than a carbon atom and a hydrogen atom, and examples thereof include an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms is preferably 2 or less.
  • Ester-based solvents having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms include amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, and butyl propionate. , Isobutyl isobutyrate, heptyl propionate, butyl butane and the like are preferred, and isoamyl acetate is more preferred.
  • the organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developing solution is replaced with the ester solvent and the ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less hetero atoms.
  • a mixed solvent of the above-mentioned hydrocarbon solvent or the above-mentioned ketone solvent and the above-mentioned hydrocarbon solvent may be used. Even in this case, it is effective in suppressing the swelling of the resist film.
  • ester solvent When an ester solvent and a hydrocarbon solvent are used in combination, it is preferable to use isoamyl acetate as the ester solvent.
  • hydrocarbon solvent a saturated hydrocarbon solvent (for example, octane, nonane, decane, dodecane, undecane, hexadecane, etc.) is preferable from the viewpoint of adjusting the solubility of the resist film.
  • a ketone solvent and a hydrocarbon solvent are used in combination, it is preferable to use 2-heptanone as the ketone solvent.
  • a saturated hydrocarbon solvent for example, octane, nonane, decane, dodecane, undecane, hexadecane, etc. is preferable from the viewpoint of adjusting the solubility of the resist film.
  • the content of the hydrocarbon solvent depends on the solvent solubility of the resist membrane, and is not particularly limited, and the required amount may be determined as appropriate.
  • a plurality of the above organic solvents may be mixed, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above or water and used.
  • the water content of the developing solution as a whole is preferably less than 10% by mass, and more preferably substantially no water is contained.
  • the concentration of the organic solvent (total in the case of a plurality of mixture) in the developing solution is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, further preferably 85 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass. , 95-100% by mass is most preferable.
  • the method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, but for example, a method of continuously discharging the rinsing liquid onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), or immersing the substrate in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. Examples thereof include a method (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinse liquid on the substrate surface (spray method).
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse liquid remaining between the patterns and inside the patterns are removed by baking. In addition, this step has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving the surface roughness of the pattern.
  • the heating step after the rinsing step is usually performed at 40 to 250 ° C. (preferably 90 to 200 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 to 120 seconds).
  • the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 4 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) to form the pattern on the substrate.
  • the processing method of the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but the pattern is formed on the substrate by performing dry etching on the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) using the pattern formed in step 4 as a mask.
  • the method of forming is preferred.
  • the dry etching may be one-step etching or multi-step etching. When the etching is an etching consisting of a plurality of stages, the etching of each stage may be the same process or different processes.
  • Various materials other than the resist composition used in the pattern forming method of the present invention are impurities such as metals (for example, a composition for forming a top coat).
  • impurities such as metals (for example, a composition for forming a top coat).
  • the content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably, for example, 1 mass ppm or less.
  • the filter pore size is preferably less than 100 nm, more preferably 10 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or less.
  • a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon is preferable.
  • the filter may be composed of a composite material in which the above filter material and an ion exchange medium are combined.
  • the filter may be one that has been previously washed with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel.
  • filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination. Further, various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering the various materials a plurality of times may be a circulation filtration step.
  • a method of reducing impurities such as metals in various materials other than the resist composition a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials, and a filter for the raw material constituting various materials. Examples thereof include a method of performing filtration and a method of performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
  • impurities may be removed by an adsorbent in addition to the above-mentioned filter filtration, and the filter filtration and the adsorbent may be combined. You may use it.
  • a known adsorbent can be used.
  • an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used.
  • Conductive compounds are added to organic treatment liquids such as rinse liquids to prevent failures of chemical liquid piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. You may.
  • the conductive compound is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methanol.
  • the amount to be added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of maintaining preferable development characteristics or rinse characteristics.
  • various pipes coated with SUS (stainless steel) or antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perflooloalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used.
  • antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.
  • a method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern may be applied to the pattern formed by the method of the present invention.
  • Examples of the method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern include a method of treating the pattern with a plasma of a hydrogen-containing gas disclosed in International Publication No. 2014/002808.
  • SPIE Vol. 8328 83280N-1 "EUV Resist Curing Technology for LWR Reduction and Etch Sensitivity Enhancement" can be mentioned.
  • the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the line width is preferably 2.5 or less, more preferably 2.1 or less, still more preferably 1.7 or less. ..
  • the pattern to be formed is a trench pattern or a contact hole pattern
  • the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the trench width or the hole diameter is preferably 4.0 or less, preferably 3.5. The following is more preferable, and 3.0 or less is further preferable.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention can also be used for guide pattern forming in DSA (Directed Self-Assembly) (see, for example, ACS Nano Vol. 4 No. 8 Page 4815-4823).
  • DSA Directed Self-Assembly
  • the pattern formed by the above method can be used as, for example, the core material (core) of the spacer process disclosed in JP-A-3-270227 and JP2013-164509.
  • the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the above-mentioned pattern forming method.
  • the electronic device is preferably mounted on an electric / electronic device (home appliance, OA (Office Automation), media-related device, optical device, communication device, etc.).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the resins A-1 to A-6 and A-8 to A-20 were measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) (polystyrene equivalent). Is).
  • the composition ratio (mol% ratio) of the resin was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw: polystyrene equivalent) determined from the GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) of the obtained resin A-1 was 6500, and the dispersity (Mw / Mn) was 1.52. 13
  • the composition ratio measured by C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance) was 50/50 in molar ratio.
  • Photoacid generator ⁇ First photoacid generator>
  • the structures of the photoacid generators B (Compounds B-1 to B-15) shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
  • Compounds B-1 to B-15 correspond to the above-mentioned compound (I).
  • additive resin (resin (B)) and topcoat resin The additive resins (E-1 to E-11) shown in Tables 3 and 7 and the topcoat resins (PT-1 to PT-3) shown in Table 5 were synthetic ones.
  • Table 2 shows the molar ratios and weights of the repeating units in the additive resins (E-1 to E-11) shown in Tables 3 and 7 and the topcoat resins (PT-1 to PT-3) shown in Table 5.
  • the average molecular weight (Mw) and the degree of dispersion (Mw / Mn) are shown.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the added resins E-1 to E-11 and the topcoat resins PT-1 to PT-3 were measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)). (It is a polystyrene-equivalent amount).
  • the composition ratio (mol% ratio) of the resin was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
  • H-1 Megafuck F176 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine-based surfactant)
  • H-3 PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorine-based surfactant)
  • the content (mass%) of each component means the content with respect to the total solid content.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-1 First, a filtration facility in which the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-1-0) is passed through the prepared resist composition (Re-1-0) in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-1-1) was obtained.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-2 First, a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, and the third filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-2-0) is passed from the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-2-1) was obtained.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-4> a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, the third filter, and the fourth filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-4-0) is passed from the first filter to the fourth filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-4-1) was obtained.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-7> First, a circulation type filtration facility connecting the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-7-0) was subjected to 10 in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-7-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-8> First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 6 hours. Then, a filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-8-0) is passed through the liquid in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-8-1) was obtained.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-9> First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 12 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-9-0) was subjected to 8 in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-9-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • ⁇ Purification Example 1-11> The prepared resist composition (Re-11-0) was passed through the first filter shown in Table 4 under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. A resist composition (Re-11-1) was obtained.
  • topcoat composition The various components contained in the topcoat composition shown in Table 5 are shown below.
  • ⁇ Resin> As the resin shown in Table 5, the resins PT-1 to PT-3 shown in Table 2 were used.
  • FT-1 4-Methyl-2-pentanol (MIBC)
  • MIBC 4-Methyl-2-pentanol
  • FT-2 n-decane
  • FT-3 diisoamyl ether
  • topcoat composition Each component shown in Table 5 was mixed so as to have a solid content concentration of 3.0% by mass, and then the obtained mixed solution was first made of a polyethylene filter having a pore size of 50 nm and then made of nylon having a pore size of 10 nm.
  • a topcoat composition was prepared by filtering in the order of a filter and finally a polyethylene filter having a pore size of 5 nm.
  • the solid content here means all components other than the solvent.
  • the resulting topcoat composition was used in the examples.
  • a topcoat film was formed on the upper layer of the resist film (the composition of the topcoat composition used is shown in Table 5).
  • the film thickness of the top coat film was 100 nm in each case.
  • An ArF excimer laser immersion scanner (manufactured by ASML; XT1700i, NA1.20, Dipole, outer sigma 0.950, inner sigma 0.850, Y-polarized light) was used on the resist film at a line width of 45 nm 1: Exposure was performed through a 6% halftone mask with a 1-line and space pattern. Ultrapure water was used as the immersion liquid. The resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with an aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (2.38% by mass) for 30 seconds, and then rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds.
  • the obtained pattern wafer was inspected with the defect evaluation device UVsion 5 manufactured by Applied Materials, and a defect MAP was prepared. After that, an image of defects was acquired using SEMVision G4 (manufactured by Applied Materials), and the actual number of defects per silicon wafer was calculated. The actual defects generated in the pattern wafer are observed as images as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, for example. The actual number of defects obtained was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the number of defects, the better the result. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6 below.
  • Table 6 is shown below.
  • P represents alkaline aqueous solution development
  • N represents organic solvent development.
  • the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is excellent.
  • at least one of the filters X used in the step X is a filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm, and at least one of the filters X has a critical surface tension of 40.
  • the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent (except for Examples 1-5).
  • the purification method is the following purification method T1 (corresponding to Example 1-8) or the following purification method T2 (Examples 1-7, 1-9, and 1-10).
  • the resist composition Re-14-0 was purified using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions according to the above-mentioned purification method to form a pattern, and one type of filter was used. Almost no difference was observed in the defect suppressing ability of the formed pattern between the case of purifying and forming the pattern. In other words, almost no improvement was observed by purification using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other.
  • the purification method of the example using the resist composition containing the first photoacid generator suppresses defects by purifying using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other. The ability was significantly improved.
  • the content (mass%) of each component means the content with respect to the total solid content.
  • ⁇ Purification example 2-7> First, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 are connected was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-21-0) was applied to the prepared resist composition (Re-21-0) in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. 6 The resist composition (Re-21-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 2-8> First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 10 hours. Then, a filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-22-0) is passed through the liquid in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-22-1) was obtained.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • ⁇ Purification Example 2-9> First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 18 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, 10 of the prepared resist composition (Re-23-0) was applied in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-23-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • ⁇ Purification Example 2-10> First, the first filter, the second filter and the third filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 10 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion, the second filter after immersion, and the third filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-24-0) was subjected to 4 in the order of the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-24-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • ⁇ Purification Example 2-13> First, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, and the third filter shown in Table 8 are connected was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-27-0) was subjected to 12 in the order of the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-27-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
  • ⁇ Purification Example 2-14> The prepared resist composition (Re-28-0) was passed through the first filter shown in Table 8 under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr ⁇ m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. A resist composition (Re-28-1) was obtained.
  • the underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm.
  • the resist composition after filtration shown in Table 9 (see Tables 7 and 8 for the composition of the resist composition after filtration) is applied thereto, and the mixture is baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to have a film thickness of 30 nm. A resist film was formed.
  • the obtained pattern wafer was inspected with the defect evaluation device UVsion 5 manufactured by Applied Materials, and a defect MAP was prepared. After that, an image of defects was acquired using SEMVision G4 (manufactured by Applied Materials), and the actual number of defects per silicon wafer was calculated. The actual defects generated in the pattern wafer are observed as images as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, for example. The actual number of defects obtained was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the number of defects, the better the result. The evaluation results are shown in Table 9 below.
  • S Number of defects is 50 or less
  • A Number of defects is more than 50 and 200 or less
  • B Number of defects is more than 200 and less than 300
  • C Number of defects is more than 300 and 400 or less
  • D The number of defects exceeds 400
  • Pattern formation and defect evaluation (4) EUV exposure, organic solvent development
  • n-butyl acetate was used as a developer for 30 seconds to develop, and then spin-dried to form a line-and-space negative pattern with a pitch of 40 nm and a line width of 20 nm (space width of 20 nm).
  • Pattern formation and defect number evaluation were carried out by the same method as in [Pattern formation and defect evaluation (3): EUV exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development]. The evaluation results are shown in Table 9 below.
  • Table 9 is shown below.
  • P represents alkaline aqueous solution development
  • N represents organic solvent development.
  • the purification method is the following purification method T1 (corresponding to Example 2-8) or the following purification method T2 (Example 2-7, Example 2-9, Example 2-10, And Example 2-13), preferably the following purification method T3 (Applicable to Examples 2-9 and 2-10), the defect suppression property of the formed pattern is further excellent.
  • Purification method T1 A step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X1 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition, which comprises the step X1 (single flow type filtration step) and before the step X1 is carried out. Purification method to be carried out.
  • Purification method T2 A purification method including step X2 (circulation type filtration step).
  • Purification method T3 A step Y including step X2 (circulation type filtration step) and immersing the filter X used in step X2 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition is carried out before carrying out step X2. Purification method.
  • the resist composition Re-31-0 is purified using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions to form a pattern according to the above-mentioned purification method, and one type of filter is used. Almost no difference was observed in the defect suppressing ability of the formed pattern between the case of purifying and forming the pattern. In other words, almost no improvement was observed by purification using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other.
  • the purification method of the example using the resist composition containing the first photoacid generator suppresses defects by purifying using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other. The ability was significantly improved.

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing a purification method for an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition which can be used to form a pattern in which defects are inhibited. The present invention also addresses another problem of providing: a pattern-forming method including a purification step based on the purification method; and a method for producing an electronic device using the pattern-forming method. The purification method according to the present invention is for an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing at least a resin having polarity which increases due to action of an acid, a compound which generates an acid due to irradiation with an actinic ray or a radiation, and a solvent, wherein the compound which generates an acid due to irradiation with an actinic ray or a radiation, includes one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds (I)-(III), and the method comprises step X for filtering the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition through two or more filters.

Description

感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法、パターン形成方法、電子デバイスの製造方法A method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a method for forming a pattern, a method for manufacturing an electronic device.
 本発明は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a method for forming a pattern, and a method for producing an electronic device.
 KrFエキシマレーザー(248nm)用レジスト以降、光吸収による感度低下を補うべく、化学増幅を利用したパターン形成方法が用いられている。例えば、ポジ型の化学増幅法では、まず、露光部に含まれる光酸発生剤が、光照射により分解して酸を発生する。そして、露光後のベーク(PEB:Post Exposure Bake)過程等において、発生した酸の触媒作用により、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下「レジスト組成物」ともいう。)に含まれる樹脂が有するアルカリ不溶性の基をアルカリ可溶性の基に変化させる等して現像液に対する溶解性を変化させる。その後、例えば塩基性水溶液を用いて、現像を行う。これにより、露光部を除去して、所望のパターンを得る。
 半導体素子の微細化のために、露光光源の短波長化及び投影レンズの高開口数(高NA)化が進み、現在では、193nmの波長を有するArFエキシマレーザーを光源とする露光機が開発されている。
 このような現状のもと、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物として、種々の構成が提案されている
Since the resist for KrF excimer laser (248 nm), a pattern forming method using chemical amplification has been used to compensate for the decrease in sensitivity due to light absorption. For example, in the positive chemical amplification method, first, the photoacid generator contained in the exposed portion is decomposed by light irradiation to generate an acid. Then, it is contained in the actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as "resist composition") due to the catalytic action of the acid generated in the baking (PEB: Post Exposure Bake) process after exposure. The solubility in the developing solution is changed by changing the alkali-insoluble group of the resin to the alkali-soluble group. Then, for example, development is carried out using a basic aqueous solution. As a result, the exposed portion is removed to obtain a desired pattern.
Due to the miniaturization of semiconductor devices, the wavelength of the exposure light source has been shortened and the numerical aperture (NA) of the projection lens has been increased. Currently, an exposure machine using an ArF excimer laser having a wavelength of 193 nm as a light source has been developed. ing.
Under these circumstances, various configurations have been proposed as sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin compositions.
 例えば、特許文献1では、レジスト組成物に使用する成分として、下記式(I)で表される塩を含む酸発生剤が開示されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 discloses an acid generator containing a salt represented by the following formula (I) as a component used in a resist composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
特開2015-024989号JP 2015-024989
 本発明者らは、特許文献1に記載されたレジスト組成物について検討したところ、上記レジスト組成物を用いてパターンを形成した際、パターンに欠陥が多く発生していることを知見した。つまり、上記レジスト組成物の製造に際して、形成されるパターンの欠陥を抑制する更なる改善が必要であることを明らかとした。 When the present inventors examined the resist composition described in Patent Document 1, they found that when a pattern was formed using the resist composition, many defects were generated in the pattern. That is, it was clarified that in the production of the resist composition, further improvement is required to suppress defects in the formed pattern.
 そこで、本発明は、欠陥が抑制されたパターンを形成し得る感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、上記精製方法に基づく精製工程を含むパターン形成方法、及び、上記パターン形成方法を用いた電子デバイスの製造方法を提供することを課題とする。
Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a pattern in which defects are suppressed.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method including a purification step based on the purification method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device using the pattern forming method.
 本発明者らは、上記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討した結果、本発明を完成させた。すなわち、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。 The present inventors have completed the present invention as a result of diligent studies to solve the above problems. That is, it was found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕 酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂と、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物と、溶剤と、を少なくとも含む感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法であり、
 上記活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する化合物が、後述する化合物(I)~化合物(III)からなる群より選ばれる1種以上の化合物を含み、
 上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を2種以上のフィルタに通過させてろ過する工程Xを含む、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔2〕 上記フィルタの臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmである、〔1〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔3〕 上記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が、40~90dyne/cmである、〔1〕又は〔2〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔4〕 上記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmであり、上記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmである、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔5〕 上記工程Xが、流路に配置された2種以上のフィルタに上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を通過させてろ過した後、上記フィルタを通過した上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を更に同じフィルタに導いて再度ろ過を行う工程X2である、〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔6〕 上記工程Xの前に、上記工程Xにて使用される上記フィルタを有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを有する、〔1〕~〔5〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔7〕 上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物が有機溶剤を含み、
 上記フィルタを浸漬する有機溶剤と、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤とが同じ種類である、〔6〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
 〔8〕 〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法により、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を精製する工程と、
 上記精製された感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて、支持体上にレジスト膜を形成する工程と、
 上記レジスト膜を露光する工程と、
 上記露光されたレジスト膜を、現像液を用いて現像する工程と、を有する、パターン形成方法。
 〔9〕 〔8〕に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。
[1] A method for purifying an active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing at least a resin whose polarity is increased by the action of an acid, a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation, and a solvent. ,
The compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later.
A method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, which comprises step X of passing the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition through two or more types of filters and filtering the composition.
[2] The method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1], wherein the critical surface tension of the filter is 10 to 90 dyne / cm.
[3] The method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1] or [2], wherein the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters is 40 to 90 dyne / cm.
[4] The critical surface tension of at least one of the filters is 40 to 90 dyne / cm, and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters is 10 to 39 dyne / cm. [1] to [ 3] The method for purifying an active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of.
[5] In the step X, the actinic cheilitis or the actinic cheilitis resin composition is passed through two or more kinds of filters arranged in the flow path and filtered, and then the actinic cheilitis is passed through the filter. Alternatively, the method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [4], which is a step X2 in which the radiation-sensitive resin composition is further guided to the same filter and filtered again. ..
[6] The actinic cheilitis or sensation according to any one of [1] to [5], which comprises a step Y of immersing the filter used in the step X in an organic solvent before the step X. A method for purifying a radioactive resin composition.
[7] The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition contains an organic solvent and contains
The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [6], wherein the organic solvent for immersing the filter and the organic solvent contained in the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition are of the same type. Purification method.
[8] A step of purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition by the method for purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [7].
A step of forming a resist film on a support using the purified actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and
The process of exposing the resist film and
A pattern forming method comprising a step of developing the exposed resist film with a developing solution.
[9] A method for manufacturing an electronic device, which comprises the pattern forming method according to [8].
 本発明によれば、欠陥が抑制されたパターンを形成し得る感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法を提供できる。
 また、本発明によれば、上記精製方法に基づく精製工程を含むパターン形成方法、及び、上記パターン形成方法を用いた電子デバイスの製造方法を提供できる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for purifying a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a pattern in which defects are suppressed.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pattern forming method including a purification step based on the purification method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device using the pattern forming method.
工程X1の実施形態の一例を説明するための装置の概略図である。It is the schematic of the apparatus for demonstrating an example of embodiment of process X1. 工程X2の実施形態の一例を説明するための装置の概略図である。It is the schematic of the apparatus for demonstrating an example of Embodiment of process X2. パターン形成後欠陥評価の評価方法を説明するための模式図であり、観察される欠陥の一例である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the evaluation method of defect evaluation after pattern formation, and is an example of observed defects. パターン形成後欠陥評価の評価方法を説明するための模式図であり、観察される欠陥の他の一例である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the evaluation method of defect evaluation after pattern formation, and is another example of observed defects.
 以下、本発明に係る、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法について詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されない。
 本明細書中における基(原子団)の表記について、本発明の趣旨に反しない限り、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基と共に置換基を有する基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。また、本明細書中における「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
 置換基は、特に断らない限り、1価の置換基が好ましい。
 本明細書中における「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光: Extreme Ultraviolet)、X線、及び電子線(EB:Electron Beam)等を意味する。本明細書中における「光」とは、活性光線又は放射線を意味する。
 本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線、X線、及びEUV光等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も含む。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書において表記される二価の基の結合方向は、特に断らない限り制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる一般式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、Yは、-CO-O-であってもよく、-O-CO-であってもよい。また、上記化合物は「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよく「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよい。
Hereinafter, a method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a method for forming a pattern, and a method for producing an electronic device according to the present invention will be described in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
Regarding the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, unless it is contrary to the gist of the present invention, the notation without substitution and non-substituent includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent. To do. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group). Further, the "organic group" in the present specification means a group containing at least one carbon atom.
Unless otherwise specified, the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent.
As used herein, the term "active light" or "radiation" refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X rays, and electron beams (EB). : Electron Beam) and the like. As used herein, "light" means active light or radiation.
Unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" as used herein refers to not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also electron beams and It also includes drawing with particle beams such as ion beams.
In the present specification, "-" is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
The bonding direction of the divalent groups described herein is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. Moreover, the said compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
 本明細書において、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレート及びメタクリレートを表し、(メタ)アクリルはアクリル及びメタクリルを表す。
 本明細書において、樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)、数平均分子量(Mn)、及び分散度(分子量分布ともいう)(Mw/Mn)は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)装置(東ソー製HLC-8120GPC)によるGPC測定(溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン、流量(サンプル注入量):10μL、カラム:東ソー社製TSK gel Multipore HXL-M、カラム温度:40℃、流速:1.0mL/分、検出器:示差屈折率検出器(Refractive Index Detector))によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
In the present specification, (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate, and (meth) acrylic represents acrylic and methacrylic.
In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin are GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC-8120GPC manufactured by Toso). ) GPC measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection amount): 10 μL, column: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd., column temperature: 40 ° C., flow velocity: 1.0 mL / min, detector: differential refractometer It is defined as a polystyrene equivalent value by a detector (Refractive Index Detector).
 本明細書において酸解離定数(pKa)とは、水溶液中での酸解離定数(pKa)を表し、具体的には、下記ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を、計算により求められる値である。本明細書中に記載した酸解離定数(pKa)の値は、全て、このソフトウェアパッケージを用いて計算により求めた値を示す。 In the present specification, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) represents the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution, and specifically, using the following software package 1, a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values. The value based on is the value obtained by calculation. All the values of the acid dissociation constant (pKa) described in the present specification indicate the values calculated by using this software package.
 ソフトウェアパッケージ1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs)。 Software Package 1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD / Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD / Labors).
 一方で、酸解離定数(pKa)は、分子軌道計算法によっても求められる。この具体的な方法としては、熱力学サイクルに基づいて、水溶液中におけるH解離自由エネルギーを計算することで算出する手法が挙げられる。H解離自由エネルギーの計算方法については、例えばDFT(密度汎関数法)により計算することができるが、他にも様々な手法が文献等で報告されており、これに制限されるものではない。なお、DFTを実施できるソフトウェアは複数存在するが、例えば、Gaussian16が挙げられる。 On the other hand, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) can also be obtained by the molecular orbital calculation method. As a specific method for this, there is a method of calculating by calculating H + dissociation free energy in an aqueous solution based on a thermodynamic cycle. The calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated by, for example, DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature and are not limited to this. .. There are a plurality of software that can perform DFT, and examples thereof include Gaussian16.
 本明細書中の酸解離定数(pKa)とは、上述した通り、ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を計算により求められる値を指すが、この手法により酸解離定数(pKa)が算出できない場合には、DFT(密度汎関数法)に基づいてGaussian16により得られる値を採用するものとする。
 また、本明細書中の酸解離定数(pKa)は、上述した通り「水溶液中での酸解離定数(pKa)」を指すが、水溶液中での酸解離定数(pKa)が算出できない場合には、「ジメチルスルホキシド(DMSO)溶液中での酸解離定数(pKa)」を採用するものとする。
As described above, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in the present specification refers to a value obtained by calculating a value based on a database of Hammett's substituent constant and publicly known literature value using Software Package 1. If the acid dissociation constant (pKa) cannot be calculated by this method, the value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density general function method) shall be adopted.
Further, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in the present specification refers to the "acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution" as described above, but when the acid dissociation constant (pKa) in an aqueous solution cannot be calculated, , "Acid dissociation constant (pKa) in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) solution" shall be adopted.
 本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法]
 本発明の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法(以下「本発明の精製方法」ともいう。)は、酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂(以下「酸分解性樹脂」又は「樹脂(A)」ともいう。)と、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物(以下「光酸発生剤」ともいう。)と、溶剤と、を少なくとも含む感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下「レジスト組成物」ともいう。)の精製方法に関する。
 本発明の精製方法の第1の特徴点としては、光酸発生剤が、後述する化合物(I)~化合物(III)からなる群より選ばれる1種以上の光酸発生剤(以下「特定光酸発生剤」ともいう。)を含む点が挙げられる。また、本発明の精製方法の第2の特徴点としては、精製の対象となるレジスト組成物を2種以上のフィルタに通過させてろ過する工程Xを含む点が挙げられる。
[Method for Purifying Actinic Photosensitive or Radiation Sensitive Resin Composition]
The method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as “the purification method of the present invention”) is a resin whose polarity is increased by the action of an acid (hereinafter, “acid-degradable resin” or “acid-degradable resin”). "Resin (A)"), a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as "photoacid generator"), and a solvent. The present invention relates to a method for purifying a radioactive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”).
The first feature of the purification method of the present invention is that the photoacid generator is one or more photoacid generators selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later (hereinafter, "specific light"). It is also referred to as an "acid generator"). Further, the second characteristic point of the purification method of the present invention is that it includes a step X of passing the resist composition to be purified through two or more kinds of filters and filtering it.
 今般、本発明者らは、特許文献1にて使用される上記一般式(I)で表される光酸発生剤の如く、分子内に多価(例えば2価)の塩構造を含む光酸発生剤は、レジスト組成物中において上記塩構造に起因して光酸発生剤同士での凝集体及び/又は他の配合成分との凝集体を形成し易く、この結果として、パターンを形成した際に欠陥が多く発生することを知見した。
 本発明者らは上記知見に対して鋭意検討を行ったところ、分子内に多価の塩構造を含む光酸発生剤である特定酸発生剤を含むレジスト組成物においては、上記レジスト組成物を2種以上のフィルタに通過させてろ過する工程Xを実施することにより、得られるパターンの欠陥発生量を顕著に低減できることを明らかとした。
 この作用機序は明らかではないが、上記工程Xによれば、レジスト組成物中に含まれる特定光酸発生剤の凝集性が緩和され、結果として、特定光酸発生剤同士及び/又は特定光酸発生剤と他の配合成分との凝集体の形成が抑制されるためと推測される。
Nowadays, the present inventors have a photoacid containing a polyvalent (for example, divalent) salt structure in the molecule, such as the photoacid generator represented by the above general formula (I) used in Patent Document 1. The generator tends to form aggregates between the photoacid generators and / or with other compounding components due to the salt structure in the resist composition, and as a result, when a pattern is formed. It was found that many defects occur in the.
As a result of diligent studies on the above findings, the present inventors have found that in a resist composition containing a specific acid generator, which is a photoacid generator containing a polyvalent salt structure in the molecule, the resist composition is used. It was clarified that the amount of defects generated in the obtained pattern can be remarkably reduced by carrying out the step X of passing through two or more types of filters for filtration.
Although the mechanism of action is not clear, according to the above step X, the cohesiveness of the specific photoacid generator contained in the resist composition is relaxed, and as a result, the specific photoacid generators and / or the specific light are alleviated. It is presumed that this is because the formation of aggregates between the acid generator and other compounding components is suppressed.
 また、後述するように、上記工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタの臨界表面張力は、10~90dyne/cmであることが好ましい。特に、上記工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmである場合(なかでも、上記工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタのうち、少なくとも1種のフィルタの臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmであり、少なくとも1種のフィルタの臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmである場合)、得られるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れることを確認している。 Further, as will be described later, the critical surface tension of the filter used in the above step X is preferably 10 to 90 din / cm. In particular, when the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters used in the step X is 40 to 90 din / cm (among others, the filter of at least one of the filters used in the step X When the critical surface tension is 40 to 90 dyne / cm and the critical surface tension of at least one filter is 10 to 39 dyne / cm), it has been confirmed that the defect suppression property of the obtained pattern is more excellent.
 また、後述するように、本発明の精製方法が、精製方法T1であるか、又は精製方法T2(好ましくは精製方法T3)である場合、得られるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れることを確認している。 Further, as described later, it was confirmed that when the purification method of the present invention is the purification method T1 or the purification method T2 (preferably the purification method T3), the defect suppressing property of the obtained pattern is more excellent. ing.
 以下において、本発明の精製方法が含む工程Xについて説明する。 The step X included in the purification method of the present invention will be described below.
〔工程X〕
 工程Xは、レジスト組成物を2種以上のフィルタ(以下「フィルタX」ともいう。)に通過させてろ過する工程である。
 ここで、「ろ過」という用語には、通常使用される化学的な「ろ過」(「多孔質性物質の膜や相を用いて流動体の相[気体若しくは液体]だけを透過させ、半固相若しくは固体を流動体の相から分離すること」化学大事典9 昭和37年7月31日発行 共立出版株式会社)の意味に加えて、単に「フィルタを通過させる」場合、すなわち膜等の分離部材を通過させることによって分離部材によってトラップされた半固相もしくは固体が視覚的に確認できない場合等も含むものとする。
 また、本発明において、フィルタを通過させるレジスト組成物は、製品と同様の濃度のレジスト組成物でもよいし、希釈前の固形分濃度の比較的高い、いわゆる「原液」も含む概念とする。また、本明細書においては、特に原液と製品と同様の濃度のものとを区別していない場合は、原液を含む概念として記載されているものとする。
[Step X]
The step X is a step of passing the resist composition through two or more types of filters (hereinafter, also referred to as “filter X”) and filtering the resist composition.
Here, the term "filtration" refers to the commonly used chemical "filtration"("a film or phase of a porous material is used to permeate only the phase [gas or liquid] of a fluid and is semi-solid. Separating a phase or solid from a fluid phase ”Chemical Encyclopedia 9 Published July 31, 1958 Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.) In addition to the meaning, simply“ passing through a filter ”, that is, separating a film or the like. It also includes the case where the semi-solid phase or solid trapped by the separating member cannot be visually confirmed by passing the member.
Further, in the present invention, the resist composition to be passed through the filter may be a resist composition having the same concentration as the product, or a concept including a so-called "stock solution" having a relatively high solid content concentration before dilution. Further, in the present specification, when the undiluted solution and the product having the same concentration as the product are not particularly distinguished, it is described as a concept including the undiluted solution.
 また、「2種以上のフィルタ」とは、表面臨界張力が異なるフィルタを意図する。つまり、工程Xにおいては、表面臨界張力が異なる2種以上のフィルタを使用する。したがって、例えば、表面臨界張力さえ異なっていれば、素材及び孔径等のその他の構成が同一であってもよい。 Also, "two or more types of filters" are intended to be filters with different surface critical tensions. That is, in step X, two or more types of filters having different surface critical tensions are used. Therefore, for example, other configurations such as the material and the pore diameter may be the same as long as the surface critical tension is different.
 以下においては、まず、フィルタXについて説明した後、手順について説明する。
 フィルタXの構造としては特に制限されず、例えば、樹脂等から形成された膜(以下「樹脂膜」ともいう。)であってもよいし、及び樹脂膜と上記樹脂膜を支持する支持部材とから構成されたものであってもよい。
In the following, first, the filter X will be described, and then the procedure will be described.
The structure of the filter X is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a film formed of a resin or the like (hereinafter, also referred to as “resin film”), and a resin film and a support member that supports the resin film. It may be composed of.
 上記フィルタXの素材としては特に制限されないが、例えば、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、及びポリイミド樹脂等の樹脂が挙げられる。
 上記ポリアミド樹脂としては、ナイロン(ナイロンとしては、ナイロン6、ナイロン66、及びナイロン46等が挙げられる。)が好ましい。
 上記ポリオレフィン樹脂としては、ポリエチレン(PE)又はポリプロピレン(PP)が好ましい。
 上記フッ素樹脂としては、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)が好ましい。
The material of the filter X is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include resins such as polyamide resin, polyolefin resin, and polyimide resin.
As the polyamide resin, nylon (nylons include nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 46, and the like) is preferable.
As the polyolefin resin, polyethylene (PE) or polypropylene (PP) is preferable.
As the fluororesin, PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) is preferable.
 また、上記フィルタXとしては、上述したリアミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、及びポリイミド樹脂等の樹脂から形成された樹脂膜であってもよいし、上記樹脂膜と上記樹脂膜を支持する支持部材とから構成されたものであってもよい。 Further, the filter X may be a resin film formed of a resin such as the above-mentioned lyamide resin, polyolefin resin, and polyimide resin, or may be composed of the above-mentioned resin film and a support member for supporting the above-mentioned resin film. It may be the one that has been made.
 フィルタXの孔径としては特に制限されないが、ろ過効率の観点から、例えば、0.5μm以下が好ましく、0.4μm以下がより好ましく、0.3μm以下が更に好ましい。孔径の下限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、0.001μm以上である。なお、本明細書において、「孔径」とは、メーカーの公称径値を意図する。 The pore size of the filter X is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of filtration efficiency, for example, 0.5 μm or less is preferable, 0.4 μm or less is more preferable, and 0.3 μm or less is further preferable. The lower limit of the pore diameter is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 0.001 μm or more. In the present specification, the "hole diameter" is intended to be the manufacturer's nominal diameter value.
 フィルタXとしては、なかでも、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れる点で、臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmのものが好ましい。
 ここで「臨界表面張力」とは、表面張力(γ)既知の複数の測定標準液体物質を用いて固体表面の接触角(θ)を各々測定し、その「cosθ」対「表面張力(γ)」をプロット(Zismannプロット)し、固/液体の接触角でcosθ=1を与えるときの表面張力γLVの外挿値をいう。
 なお、本明細書における「臨界表面張力」とは、メーカーの公称値を意図する。メーカーの公称値がない場合、測定標準液体物質として水及びヨードメタンを使用し、且つ温度23℃、湿度40%の条件下にて上記方法により測定される値を意図する。
Among the filters X, those having a critical surface tension of 10 to 90 din / cm are preferable in that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent.
Here, "critical surface tension" means the contact angle (θ) of a solid surface measured using a plurality of measurement standard liquid substances known as surface tension (γ), and the “cosθ” vs. “surface tension (γ)”. Is plotted (Zismann plot) and refers to the extrapolated value of the surface tension γ LV when cos θ = 1 is given at the contact angle of solid / liquid.
The term "critical surface tension" as used herein is intended to be a manufacturer's nominal value. If there is no manufacturer's nominal value, water and iodomethane are used as measurement standard liquid substances, and the value measured by the above method is intended under the conditions of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a humidity of 40%.
 フィルタXの臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmである場合に、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れるのは、下記理由によると推測される。
 フィルタを通過する対象物は、その表面張力が、フィルタにおける臨界表面張力と近いときに、フィルタとの親和性が高くなり、フィルタに吸着されやすい傾向がある。対象物の表面張力は、素材によって異なる。素材固有の表面張力に適合した臨界表面張力を備えるフィルタにより、所望の対象物のみを除去することができる。より具体的には、界面活性剤及び気泡を例に挙げて説明すると、界面活性剤と気泡との表面張力はそれぞれ異なる。従って、フィルタの臨界表面張力を、界面活性剤の表面張力の適合範囲から外し、且つ気泡の表面張力に適合するように制御すれば、界面活性剤を吸着させずに気泡のみを吸着できる。
 本発明者らの検討によれば、フィルタXの臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmである場合(特に、フィルタXの臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmである場合)、特定光酸発生剤を起因とする凝集物の表面張力に適合し、凝集物がフィルタXに吸着され易いと考えられる。
When the critical surface tension of the filter X is 10 to 90 din / cm, it is presumed that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent for the following reasons.
When the surface tension of an object passing through the filter is close to the critical surface tension of the filter, the object has a high affinity with the filter and tends to be easily adsorbed by the filter. The surface tension of an object depends on the material. Only the desired object can be removed by a filter having a critical surface tension suitable for the surface tension peculiar to the material. More specifically, if a surfactant and bubbles are taken as an example, the surface tensions of the surfactant and the bubbles are different from each other. Therefore, if the critical surface tension of the filter is removed from the applicable range of the surface tension of the surfactant and controlled so as to be compatible with the surface tension of the bubbles, only the bubbles can be adsorbed without adsorbing the surfactant.
According to the study by the present inventors, when the critical surface tension of the filter X is 10 to 90 dyne / cm (particularly, when the critical surface tension of the filter X is 40 to 90 dyne / cm), the specific photoacid generator It is considered that the agglomerates are easily adsorbed by the filter X because they are compatible with the surface tension of the agglomerates caused by the above.
 臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmであるフィルタとしては、例えば、支持部材に支持されたナイロン膜(臨界表面張力:77dyne/cm)、ナイロン膜単体(臨界表面張力:46dyne/cm)、支持部材に支持されたポリエチレン膜(臨界表面張力:36dyne/cm)、支持部材に支持されたPTFE(臨界表面張力:28dyne/cm)、PTFE膜単体(臨界表面張力:18.5dyne/cm)、及びポリイミド膜単体(臨界表面張力:45dyne/cm)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 90 dyne / cm include a nylon film supported by a support member (critical surface tension: 77 dyne / cm), a nylon film alone (critical surface tension: 46 dyne / cm), and a support member. Polyethylene membrane supported by (critical surface tension: 36 dyne / cm), PTFE supported by supporting member (critical surface tension: 28 dyne / cm), PTFE membrane alone (critical surface tension: 18.5 dyne / cm), and polyimide Examples thereof include a single membrane (critical surface tension: 45 dyne / cm).
 特定光酸発生剤を起因とする凝集物がフィルタXにより吸着しやすく、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れる点で、フィルタXのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が、40~90dyne/cmであることが好ましく、フィルタXのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmであり、且つフィルタXのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、工程Xにおいて、臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmを満たすフィルタを2種以上使用する場合、臨界表面張力の最も大きいフィルタの臨界表面張力と、臨界表面張力の最も小さいフィルタの臨界表面張力との差が、8dyne/cm以上であることが好ましい。なお、上記差の上限値としては特に制限されないが、50dyne/cm以下であることが好ましい。
The critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 dyne in that the agglomerates caused by the specific photoacid generator are easily adsorbed by the filter X and the defect suppression property of the formed pattern is more excellent. It is preferably / cm, and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 dyne / cm, and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 10 to 39 dyne / cm. Is more preferable.
Further, in step X, when two or more types of filters satisfying the critical surface tension of 10 to 90 din / cm are used, the critical surface tension of the filter having the highest critical surface tension and the critical surface tension of the filter having the smallest critical surface tension are used. The difference from the above is preferably 8 dyne / cm or more. The upper limit of the difference is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 dyne / cm or less.
 工程Xで使用するフィルタXの枚数は特に制限されないが、例えば、2枚以上が好ましく、3枚以上がより好ましい。上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、10枚以下が好ましく、6枚以下がより好ましい。なお、工程Xで使用するフィルタXのうち2種以上の臨界表面張力が互いに異なっていさえすれば、その他のフィルタXの臨界表面張力は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 The number of filters X used in the step X is not particularly limited, but for example, two or more are preferable, and three or more are more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 10 or less is preferable, and 6 or less is more preferable. The critical surface tensions of the other filters X may be the same or different as long as the critical surface tensions of two or more of the filters X used in the step X are different from each other.
 以下において、工程Xの具体的な手順について説明する。 The specific procedure of step X will be described below.
 工程Xは、15~25℃の温度環境下にて実施されることが好ましい。 Step X is preferably carried out in a temperature environment of 15 to 25 ° C.
 工程Xにおいて、各フィルタX間の差圧(各フィルタX前後の圧力損失を意図する。)は、0.3MPa以下が好ましく、0.2MPa以下がより好ましく、0.1MPa未満が更に好ましい。下限とは特に制限されないが、0MPaが挙げられる。
 また、工程Xにおいて、レジスト組成物が、流路に配置されたフィルタのうち最上流側のフィルタを通過する前と、最下流側のフィルタを通過した後との差圧は、0.3MPa以下が好ましく、0.2MPa以下がより好ましく、0.1MPa未満が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、0MPaが挙げられる。
In the step X, the differential pressure between the filters X (intentionally, the pressure loss before and after each filter X) is preferably 0.3 MPa or less, more preferably 0.2 MPa or less, and further preferably less than 0.1 MPa. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0 MPa can be mentioned.
Further, in step X, the differential pressure between before the resist composition passes through the filter on the most upstream side and after passing through the filter on the most downstream side among the filters arranged in the flow path is 0.3 MPa or less. Is preferable, 0.2 MPa or less is more preferable, and less than 0.1 MPa is further preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0 MPa can be mentioned.
 工程Xとしては、具体的に、下記工程X1及び下記工程X2が挙げられる。形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性により優れる点で、工程X2が好ましい。
 工程X1:流路に配置された2種以上のフィルタXに、レジスト組成物を一回通過させる一回通液型ろ過工程
 工程X2:流路に配置された2種以上のフィルタXにレジスト組成物を通過させてろ過した後、上記フィルタXを通過したレジスト組成物を更に同じフィルタに導いて再度ろ過を行う循環型ろ過工程
 すなわち、工程X1は、2種以上のフィルタXが直列に接続された系中にレジスト組成物を一回通過させる一回通液方式に該当し、工程X2は、フィルタXを通過した上記レジスト組成物を更に同じフィルタに導き、閉鎖系内を循環させる循環方式に該当する。なお、工程X1により本発明の精製方法を実施する場合、工程X1を複数回繰り返して実施してもよい。
Specific examples of the process X include the following process X1 and the following process X2. Step X2 is preferable in that it is more excellent in defect suppression of the formed pattern.
Step X1: Single-passing type filtration step in which the resist composition is passed once through two or more types of filters X arranged in the flow path Step X2: Resist composition through two or more types of filters X arranged in the flow path. A circulating filtration step in which a resist composition that has passed through the filter X is further guided to the same filter and filtered again after passing through an object. That is, in step X1, two or more types of filters X are connected in series. Corresponding to the one-time liquid passing method in which the resist composition is passed through the system once, the step X2 is a circulation method in which the resist composition passing through the filter X is further guided to the same filter and circulated in the closed system. Applicable. When the purification method of the present invention is carried out by step X1, the step X1 may be repeated a plurality of times.
 工程Xが工程X2である場合、レジスト組成物の循環回数は、例えば2回以上であり、3回以上が好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、15回以下であり、10回以下が好ましい。 When the step X is the step X2, the number of cycles of the resist composition is, for example, 2 times or more, preferably 3 times or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15 times or less, preferably 10 times or less.
 本発明の精製方法は、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れる点で、工程Xの前に、工程Xにて使用されるフィルタXを有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを含むことが好ましい。
 上記有機溶剤としては特に制限されないが、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレート、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸エステル、酢酸エステル、酪酸ブチル、アルコキシプロピオン酸エステル、鎖状ケトン、環状ケトン、ラクトン、及びアルキレンカーボネート等が挙げられる。
The purification method of the present invention preferably includes a step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X in an organic solvent before the step X in that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent.
The organic solvent is not particularly limited, but is propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetic acid ester, butyl butyrate, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. And so on.
 プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレートとしては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート、及びプロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート等が挙げられる。
 プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルとしては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、又はプロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル(PGEE)が好ましい。
 乳酸エステルとしては、乳酸エチル、乳酸ブチル、又は乳酸プロピルが好ましい。
 酢酸エステルとしては、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸イソアミル、蟻酸メチル、蟻酸エチル、蟻酸ブチル、蟻酸プロピル、又は酢酸3-メトキシブチルが好ましい。
 アルコキシプロピオン酸エステルとしては、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル(MMP)、又は3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(EEP)が好ましい。
 鎖状ケトンとしては、1-オクタノン、2-オクタノン、1-ノナノン、2-ノナノン、アセトン、2-ヘプタノン、4-ヘプタノン、1-ヘキサノン、2-ヘキサノン、ジイソブチルケトン、フェニルアセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、アセチルアセトン、アセトニルアセトン、イオノン、ジアセトニルアルコール、アセチルカービノール、アセトフェノン、メチルナフチルケトン、又はメチルアミルケトンが好ましい。
 環状ケトンとしては、メチルシクロヘキサノン、イソホロン、又はシクロヘキサノンが好ましい。
 ラクトンとしては、γ-ブチロラクトンが好ましい。
 アルキレンカーボネートとしては、プロピレンカーボネートが好ましい。
Examples of the propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate.
As the propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) or propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE) is preferable.
As the lactate ester, ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, or propyl lactate is preferable.
As the acetic acid ester, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferable.
As the alkoxypropionic acid ester, methyl 3-methoxypropionate (MMP) or ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (EEP) is preferable.
Chain ketones include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl. Ketones, acetylacetones, acetonylacetones, ionones, diacetonyl alcohols, acetylcarbinol, acetophenones, methylnaphthyl ketones, or methylamyl ketones are preferred.
As the cyclic ketone, methylcyclohexanone, isophorone, or cyclohexanone is preferable.
As the lactone, γ-butyrolactone is preferable.
As the alkylene carbonate, propylene carbonate is preferable.
 浸漬時間としては特に制限されないが、6~24時間が好ましい。
 また浸漬時の有機溶剤の温度としては特に制限されないが、15~25℃が好ましい。
The immersion time is not particularly limited, but 6 to 24 hours is preferable.
The temperature of the organic solvent during immersion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 15 to 25 ° C.
 有機溶剤としては、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れる点で、レジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤であることが好ましい。つまり、フィルタXを浸漬する有機溶剤と、レジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤とが同じ種類であることが好ましい。 The organic solvent is preferably an organic solvent contained in the resist composition because it is more excellent in suppressing defects in the formed pattern. That is, it is preferable that the organic solvent for immersing the filter X and the organic solvent contained in the resist composition are of the same type.
 以下において、工程Xの実施形態の一例について、図面を参照して説明する。図1及び図2は、工程Xに用いられる装置の概略図である。 In the following, an example of the embodiment of step X will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 2 are schematic views of the apparatus used in step X.
 図1の装置は、工程Xとして工程X1(1回のみの一回通液方式)を実施する場合に用いられる装置である。
 図1の装置は、3枚のフィルタX(フィルタX1、X2、X3)を有し、3枚のフィルタXのうちの1枚は臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmであり、1枚は臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmである。
 図3の装置では、タンク1、ポンプ2、フィルタX1が設置されたカラム100、フィルタX2が設置されたカラム200、及びフィルタX3が設置されたカラム300が、流路5、6、7、9、及び10で接続されている。更に、流路7に、流量計3、及び充填口8が設置されている。ポンプ2を駆動させることにより、タンク1に充填されたレジスト組成物はカラム100、カラム200、及びカラム300を通過し、カラム300を通過したレジスト組成物が処理液充填容器4に充填される。
The device of FIG. 1 is a device used when step X1 (one-time liquid passing method only once) is carried out as step X.
The apparatus of FIG. 1 has three filters X (filters X1, X2, X3), one of the three filters X has a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 dyne / cm, and one is critical. The surface tension is 40 to 90 dyne / cm.
In the apparatus of FIG. 3, the tank 1, the pump 2, the column 100 in which the filter X1 is installed, the column 200 in which the filter X2 is installed, and the column 300 in which the filter X3 is installed are the flow paths 5, 6, 7, and 9. , And 10 are connected. Further, a flow meter 3 and a filling port 8 are installed in the flow path 7. By driving the pump 2, the resist composition filled in the tank 1 passes through the column 100, the column 200, and the column 300, and the resist composition that has passed through the column 300 is filled in the treatment liquid filling container 4.
 図2の装置は、工程Xとして工程X2(循環方式)を実施する場合に用いられる装置である。
 図2の装置は、3枚のフィルタX(フィルタX4、X5、X6)を有し、3枚のフィルタXのうちの1枚は臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmであり、1枚は臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmである。
 図2の装置では、タンク1、ポンプ2、フィルタX4が設置されたカラム400、フィルタX5が設置されたカラム500、及びフィルタX6が設置されたカラム600が、流路5、6、7、9、及び10で接続されている。
 また、流路7は、タンク1にも接続されており、ポンプ2を駆動させることにより、タンク1内に収容されたレジスト組成物が、系内で循環されるようになっている。更に、流路7に、充填口8が設置されており、所定の循環ろ過工程を経たレジスト組成物が処理液充填容器4に充填されるようになっている。
 ここで、所定の循環回数を達成できるように、ポンプの駆動開始時点では充填口8は閉じられている場合が多い。
 循環回数は流路7に設置された流量計3を用いて計算できる。
The device of FIG. 2 is a device used when step X2 (circulation method) is carried out as step X.
The apparatus of FIG. 2 has three filters X (filters X4, X5, X6), one of the three filters X has a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 dyne / cm, and one is critical. The surface tension is 40 to 90 dyne / cm.
In the apparatus of FIG. 2, the tank 1, the pump 2, the column 400 in which the filter X4 is installed, the column 500 in which the filter X5 is installed, and the column 600 in which the filter X6 is installed are the flow paths 5, 6, 7, and 9. , And 10 are connected.
Further, the flow path 7 is also connected to the tank 1, and by driving the pump 2, the resist composition contained in the tank 1 is circulated in the system. Further, a filling port 8 is installed in the flow path 7, and the resist composition that has undergone a predetermined circulation filtration step is filled in the treatment liquid filling container 4.
Here, the filling port 8 is often closed at the start of driving the pump so that a predetermined number of circulations can be achieved.
The number of circulations can be calculated using the flow meter 3 installed in the flow path 7.
 また、工程Xにおいて、フィルタXのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmであり、且つフィルタXのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmである場合、臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmのフィルタを臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmのフィルタよりも上流側に配置することが好ましい。 Further, in step X, when the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 40 to 90 din / cm and the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters X is 10 to 39 dyne / cm. It is preferable to arrange the filter having a critical surface tension of 40 to 90 din / cm on the upstream side of the filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm.
 本発明の精製方法は、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れる点で、工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタXのうち、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmのフィルタであり、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmのフィルタであり、且つ、下記精製方法T1であるか、又は下記精製方法T2(好ましくは下記精製方法T3)が好ましい。
 精製方法T1:工程X1(一回通液型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X1を実施する前に、工程X1で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
 精製方法T2:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含む精製方法。
 精製方法T3:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X2を実施する前に、工程X2で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
In the purification method of the present invention, at least one of the filters X used in the step X is a filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm in that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent. At least one of the filters has a critical surface tension of 40 to 90 din / cm, and the following purification method T1 is used, or the following purification method T2 (preferably the following purification method T3) is preferable.
Purification method T1: A step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X1 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition, which comprises the step X1 (single flow type filtration step) and before the step X1 is carried out. Purification method to be carried out.
Purification method T2: A purification method including step X2 (circulation type filtration step).
Purification method T3: A step Y including step X2 (circulation type filtration step) and immersing the filter X used in step X2 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition is carried out before carrying out step X2. Purification method.
 次に、本発明の精製方法の対象となるレジスト組成物について説明する。 Next, the resist composition that is the subject of the purification method of the present invention will be described.
〔レジスト組成物〕
 本発明の精製方法の対象となるレジスト組成物(以下「特定レジスト組成物」ともいう。)は、特定光酸発生剤を含む光酸発生剤、酸分解性樹脂(樹脂(A))、及び溶剤を少なくとも含む。
 特定レジスト組成物は、ポジ型のレジスト組成物であっても、ネガ型のレジスト組成物であってもよい。また、アルカリ現像用のレジスト組成物であっても、有機溶剤現像用のレジスト組成物であってもよい。
 特定レジスト組成物は、典型的には、化学増幅型のレジスト組成物である。
 以下において、まず、特定レジスト組成物の各種成分について詳述する。
[Resist composition]
The resist composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific resist composition”) that is the subject of the purification method of the present invention includes a photoacid generator containing a specific photoacid generator, an acid-degradable resin (resin (A)), and Contains at least a solvent.
The specific resist composition may be a positive type resist composition or a negative type resist composition. Further, it may be a resist composition for alkaline development or a resist composition for organic solvent development.
The specific resist composition is typically a chemically amplified resist composition.
In the following, first, various components of the specific resist composition will be described in detail.
<光酸発生剤>
 特定レジスト組成物は、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する化合物(光酸発生剤)を含む。
 特定レジスト組成物中、光酸発生剤の含有量(複数種含まれる場合は、その合計含有量)は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~30.0質量%が好ましく、5.0~20.0質量%がより好ましい。ここでいう光酸発生剤の含有量とは、例えば、特定レジスト組成物中に含まれる光酸発生剤が後述する特定光酸発生剤と後述する特定光酸発生剤以外のその他の光酸発生剤の2種である場合、特定光酸発生剤とその他の光酸発生剤の合計含有量(質量%)を意図する。
 なお、本明細書において、レジスト組成物における「固形分」とは、レジスト膜を形成する成分を意図し、溶剤は含まれない。また、レジスト膜を形成する成分であれば、その性状が液体状であっても、固形分とみなす。
<Photoacid generator>
The specific resist composition contains a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation.
The content of the photoacid generator (when a plurality of types are contained, the total content thereof) in the specific resist composition is preferably 1.0 to 30.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, it is 5.0 to 20.0% by mass. The content of the photoacid generator here means, for example, that the photoacid generator contained in the specific resist composition is a photoacid generator other than the specific photoacid generator described later and the specific photoacid generator described later. In the case of two kinds of agents, the total content (mass%) of the specific photoacid generator and other photoacid generators is intended.
In addition, in this specification, "solid content" in a resist composition is intended as a component forming a resist film, and does not contain a solvent. Further, if it is a component forming a resist film, even if its property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content.
 上記光酸発生剤は、後述する化合物(I)~(III)からなる群より選ばれる化合物(特定光酸発生剤)を含む。
 特定光酸発生剤の含有量(複数種含む場合はその合計含有量)は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~20.0質量%が好ましく、2.0~15.0質量%がより好ましい。
 特定光酸発生剤は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
The photoacid generator contains a compound (specific photoacid generator) selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later.
The content of the specific photoacid generator (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is preferably 1.0 to 20.0% by mass, preferably 2.0 to 15.0, based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferably by mass.
The specific photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 以下において、特定光酸発生剤、及びその他の光酸発生剤について説明する。 The specific photoacid generator and other photoacid generators will be described below.
(特定光酸発生剤)
 特定光酸発生剤は、後述する化合物(I)~(III)からなる群より選ばれる化合物である。以下、化合物(I)~(III)について各々説明する。
(Specific photoacid generator)
The specific photoacid generator is a compound selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (III) described later. Hereinafter, compounds (I) to (III) will be described.
≪化合物(I)≫
 以下において、化合物(I)について説明する。
 化合物(I):下記構造部位Xと下記構造部位Yとを各々1つずつ有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、下記構造部位Xに由来する下記第1の酸性部位と下記構造部位Yに由来する下記第2の酸性部位とを含む酸を発生する化合物
  構造部位X:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によってHAで表される第1の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
  構造部位Y:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、上記構造部位Xにて形成される上記第1の酸性部位とは異なる構造のHAで表される第2の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
 但し、化合物(I)は、下記条件Iを満たす。
 条件I:上記化合物(I)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M 及び上記構造部位Y中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1と、上記構造部位Y中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2を有し、且つ、上記酸解離定数a1よりも上記の酸解離定数a2の方が大きい。
 なお、酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2は、上述した方法により求められる。化合物PIの酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2とは、より具体的に説明すると、化合物PIの酸解離定数を求めた場合において、化合物PI(化合物PIは、「HAとHAを有する化合物」に該当する。)が「A とHAを有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a1であり、上記「A とHAを有する化合物」が「A とA を有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a2である。
 また、上記化合物PIとは、化合物(I)に活性光線又は放射線を照射することにより発生する酸に該当する。
<< Compound (I) >>
The compound (I) will be described below.
Compound (I): A compound having one of the following structural sites X and one of the following structural sites Y, and the following first acidic site and the following structure derived from the following structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation. compound structure sites of generating an acid comprising the following second acidic site derived from the site Y X: anionic part a 1 - consists of a cationic sites M 1 + and Table in HA 1 by and exposed to actinic rays or radiation the first structural portion structural site to form an acidic site Y that is: anionic part a 2 - a cationic sites M 2 + consists of a and by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, the formed by the above structural moiety X The structural site forming the second acidic site represented by HA 2 having a structure different from that of the first acidic site. However, the compound (I) satisfies the following condition I.
Condition I: In the compound (I), the compound PI in which the cation site M 1 + in the structure site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structure site Y are replaced with H + is contained in the structure site X. The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 , which is obtained by replacing the above-mentioned cation site M 1 + with H + , and the above-mentioned cation site M 2 + in the above structural site Y are replaced with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from an acidic moiety represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
The acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are obtained by the above-mentioned method. More specifically, the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PI refer to the compound PI (the compound PI is a compound having HA 1 and HA 2 ) when the acid dissociation constant of the compound PI is obtained. . corresponding to ") is" a 1 - and pKa when a compound "having a HA 2 is the acid dissociation constant a1, the" a 1 - a compound having an HA 2 "is" a 1 - and a 2 - pKa when a compound "having a is an acid dissociation constant a2.
Further, the compound PI corresponds to an acid generated by irradiating compound (I) with active light or radiation.
 形成されるパターンのLWR性能がより優れる点で、上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a1と上記酸解離定数a2との差は、2.0以上が好ましく、3.0以上がより好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1と上記酸解離定数a2との差の上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、15.0以下である。 In the compound PI, the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. The upper limit of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15.0 or less.
 また、上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a2は、例えば、6.5以下であり、レジスト組成物内での化合物(I)のカチオン部位の安定性がより優れる点で、2.0以下が好ましく、1.0以下がより好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a2の下限値としては、例えば、-3.5以上であり、-2.0以上が好ましい。 Further, in the above-mentioned compound PI, the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, 6.5 or less, and 2.0 or less is preferable in that the stability of the cation moiety of the compound (I) in the resist composition is more excellent. , 1.0 or less is more preferable. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, −3.5 or higher, preferably −2.0 or higher.
 また、形成されるパターンのLWR性能がより優れる点で、上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a1は、2.0以下が好ましく、0.5以下がより好ましく、-0.1以下が更に好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1の下限値としては、-15.0以上が好ましい。 Further, in the above compound PI, the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and even more preferably −0.1 or less, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
 化合物(I)としては特に制限されないが、例えば、下記一般式(Ia)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
 M11  A11 -L-A12  M12     (Ia)
The compound (I) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a compound represented by the following general formula (Ia).
M 11 + A 11 - - L 1 - A 12 M 12 + (Ia)
 一般式(Ia)中、「M11 11 」及び「A12 12 」は、各々、構造部位X及び構造部位Yに該当する。化合物(Ia)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、HA11-L-A21Hで表される酸を発生する。つまり、「M11 11 」は、HA11で表される第1の酸性部位を形成し、「A12 12 」は、上記第1の酸性部位とは異なる構造のHA12で表される第2の酸性部位を形成する。 In the general formula (Ia), "M 11 + A 11 -" and "A 12 - M 12 +" each correspond to structural moiety X and the structural moiety Y. Compound (Ia) by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, generates an acid represented by HA 11 -L 1 -A 21 H. That is, "M 11 + A 11 -" forms a first acidic moiety represented by HA 11, "A 12 - M 12 +" is HA 12 having a structure different from that of the aforementioned first acid sites It forms a second acidic moiety represented by.
 一般式(Ia)中、M11 及びM12 は、それぞれ独立に、有機カチオンを表す。
 A11 及びA12 は、それぞれ独立に、アニオン性官能基を表す。但し、A12 は、A11 で表されるアニオン性官能基とは異なる構造を表す。
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 但し、上記一般式(Ia)において、M11 及びM12 で表される有機カチオンをHに置き換えてなる化合物PIa(HA11-L-A12H)において、A12Hで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2は、HA11で表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1よりも大きい。なお、酸解離定数a1と酸解離定数a2の好適値については、上述した通りである。
In the general formula (Ia), M 11 + and M 12 + each independently represents an organic cation.
A 11 - and A 12 - independently represents an anionic functional group. However, A 12 represents a structure different from the anionic functional group represented by A 11 .
L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
However, Table above general formula (Ia), in M 11 + and M 12 + organic cation represented by made by replacing the H + compound PIa (HA 11 -L 1 -A 12 H), at A 12 H The acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety to be produced is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by HA 11 . The preferable values of the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are as described above.
 一般式(Ia)中、M11 及びM12 で表される有機カチオンについては、後述のとおりである。 In the general formula (Ia), the organic cation represented by M 11 + and M 12 +, are as described below.
 A11 及びA12 で表されるアニオン性官能基としては、例えば、下記一般式(B-1)~一般式(B-13)で表される基が挙げられる。 A 11 - and A 12 - The anionic functional group represented by, for example, groups represented by the following general formula (B-1) ~ formula (B-13).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 一般式(B-1)、(B-2)、(B-4)、(B-5)、及び(B-12)中、RX1は、置換基を表す。
 RX1としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、フッ素原子、又はシアノ基が好ましい。上記アルキル基が置換基としてフッ素原子を有する場合、パーフルオロアルキル基であってもよい。
 また、上記アルキル基は、炭素原子がカルボニル基で置換されていてもよい。
In the general formulas (B-1), (B-2), (B-4), (B-5), and (B-12), RX1 represents a substituent.
As RX1 , a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group is preferable.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group may have a substituent. As the substituent, a fluorine atom or a cyano group is preferable. When the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as a substituent, it may be a perfluoroalkyl group.
Further, in the above alkyl group, the carbon atom may be substituted with a carbonyl group.
 一般式(B-3)中、RX4は、置換基を表す。
 RX4としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、フッ素原子、又はシアノ基が好ましい。なお、RX4が置換基としてフッ素原子を有するアルキル基である場合、パーフルオロアルキル基でないことが好ましい。
 また、上記アルキル基は、炭素原子がカルボニル基で置換されていてもよい。
In the general formula (B-3), RX4 represents a substituent.
The RX4 is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group may have a substituent. As the substituent, a fluorine atom or a cyano group is preferable. When RX4 is an alkyl group having a fluorine atom as a substituent, it is preferably not a perfluoroalkyl group.
Further, in the above alkyl group, the carbon atom may be substituted with a carbonyl group.
 一般式(B-7)及び(B-11)中、RX2は、水素原子、又は、フッ素原子及びパーフルオロアルキル基以外の置換基を表す。
 RX2で表されるフッ素原子及びパーフルオロアルキル基以外の置換基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、フッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
In the general formulas (B-7) and (B-11), RX2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent other than a fluorine atom and a perfluoroalkyl group.
The fluorine atom and a perfluoroalkyl substituents other than the groups represented by R X2, linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group are preferred.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group may have a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
 一般式(B-8)中、RXF1は、水素原子、フッ素原子、又はパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。但し、複数のRXF1のうち、少なくとも1つはフッ素原子又はパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。
 RXF1で表されるパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数は1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~6が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (B-8), RXF1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a perfluoroalkyl group. However, at least one of the plurality of RXF1 represents a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group.
The perfluoroalkyl group represented by RXF1 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 一般式(B-10)中、RXF2は、フッ素原子、又はパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。
 RXF2で表されるパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数は1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~6が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (B-10), RXF2 represents a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group.
The perfluoroalkyl group represented by RXF2 preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 一般式(B-9)中、nは、0~4の整数を表す。 In the general formula (B-9), n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 A11 及びA12 で表されるアニオン性官能基の組み合わせとしては特に制限されないが、例えば、A11 が一般式(B-8)又は(B-10)で表される基である場合、A12 で表されるアニオン性官能基としては、一般式(B-1)~(B-7)、(B-9)、又は(B-11)~(B-13)で表される基が挙げられ、A11 が一般式(B-7)で表される基である場合、A12 で表されるアニオン性官能基としては、一般式(B-6)で表される基が挙げられる。 A 11 - and A 12 - The combination of the anionic functional group represented by is not particularly limited, for example, A 11 - is a group represented by the general formula (B-8) or (B-10) If, A 12 - Table the anionic functional group represented by the general formula (B-1) ~ (B -7), (B-9), or (B-11) ~ (B -13) include groups, a 11 - when is a group represented by the general formula (B-7), a 12 - as the anionic functional group represented by the table in the general formula (B-6) The groups to be used are mentioned.
 一般式(Ia)中、Lで表される2価の連結基としては特に制限されず、-CO-、-NR-、-CO-、-O-、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6。直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい)、シクロアルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数3~15)、アルケニレン基(好ましくは炭素数2~6)、2価の脂肪族複素環基(少なくとも1つのN原子、O原子、S原子、又はSe原子を環構造内に有する5~10員環が好ましく、5~7員環がより好ましく、5~6員環が更に好ましい。)、及びこれらの複数を組み合わせた2価の連結基等が挙げられる。上記Rは、水素原子又は1価の置換基が挙げられる。1価の置換基としては特に制限されないが、例えば、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)が好ましい。
 これらの2価の連結基は、更に、-S-、-SO-、及び-SO-からなる群から選択される基を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記アルキレン基、上記シクロアルキレン基、上記アルケニレン基、及び上記2価の脂肪族複素環基は、置換基で置換されていてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(好ましくはフッ素原子)が挙げられる。
In the general formula (Ia), the divalent linking group represented by L 1 is not particularly limited, and is -CO-, -NR-, -CO-, -O-, or an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms). 6. Linear or branched chain), cycloalkylene group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), divalent aliphatic heterocyclic group (at least one) A 5- to 10-membered ring having an N atom, an O atom, an S atom, or a Se atom in the ring structure is preferable, a 5- to 7-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5- to 6-membered ring is further preferable), and a plurality of these. Examples thereof include a divalent linking group in which The above R may be a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. The monovalent substituent is not particularly limited, but for example, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) is preferable.
These divalent linking groups may further include a group selected from the group consisting of -S-, -SO-, and -SO 2- .
Further, the alkylene group, the cycloalkylene group, the alkenylene group, and the divalent aliphatic heterocyclic group may be substituted with a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom).
 一般式(Ia)中、M11 及びM12 で表される有機カチオンの好ましい形態について詳述する。
 M11 及びM12 で表される有機カチオンは、それぞれ独立に、一般式(ZaI)で表される有機カチオン(カチオン(ZaI))又は一般式(ZaII)で表される有機カチオン(カチオン(ZaII))が好ましい。
In the general formula (Ia), it will be described in detail preferred embodiments of the organic cation represented by M 11 + and M 12 +.
The organic cation represented by M 11 + and M 12 + are each independently formula (Zai) organic cation represented by (cation (Zai)) or the general formula organic cation (cation represented by (ZaII) (ZaII)) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 上記一般式(ZaI)において、
 R201、R202、及びR203は、それぞれ独立に、有機基を表す。
 R201、R202、及びR203としての有機基の炭素数は、通常1~30であり、1~20が好ましい。また、R201~R203のうち2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203の内の2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基)、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-が挙げられる。
In the above general formula (ZaI)
R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
The carbon number of the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is usually 1 to 30, preferably 1 to 20. Further, two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. The two of the group formed by bonding of the R 201 ~ R 203, for example, an alkylene group (e.g., butylene and pentylene), and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - is Can be mentioned.
 一般式(ZaI)における有機カチオンの好適な態様としては、後述する、カチオン(ZaI-1)、カチオン(ZaI-2)、一般式(ZaI-3b)で表される有機カチオン(カチオン(ZaI-3b))、及び一般式(ZaI-4b)で表される有機カチオン(カチオン(ZaI-4b))が挙げられる。 As a preferable embodiment of the organic cation in the general formula (ZaI), the organic cation represented by the cation (ZaI-1), the cation (ZaI-2), and the general formula (ZaI-3b) (cation (ZaI-)) described later will be described. Examples thereof include 3b)) and an organic cation (cation (ZaI-4b)) represented by the general formula (ZaI-4b).
 まず、カチオン(ZaI-1)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-1)は、上記一般式(ZaI)のR201~R203の少なくとも1つがアリール基である、アリールスルホニウムカチオンである。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンは、R201~R203の全てがアリール基でもよいし、R201~R203の一部がアリール基であり、残りがアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基であってもよい。
 また、R201~R203のうちの1つがアリール基であり、R201~R203のうちの残りの2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203のうちの2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、1つ以上のメチレン基が酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、及び/又はカルボニル基で置換されていてもよいアルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、又は-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-)が挙げられる。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンとしては、例えば、トリアリールスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、アリールジアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、及びアリールジシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオンが挙げられる。
First, the cation (ZaI-1) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-1) is an aryl sulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 of the above general formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
As the aryl sulfonium cation, all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or a part of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group and the rest may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
Further, one of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom may be formed in the ring. It may contain an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. As a group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 , for example, one or more methylene groups are substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and / or a carbonyl group. also an alkylene group (e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, or -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -) and the like.
Examples of the aryl sulfonium cation include a triaryl sulfonium cation, a diallyl alkyl sulfonium cation, an aryl dialkyl sulfonium cation, a diallyl cycloalkyl sulfonium cation, and an aryl dicycloalkyl sulfonium cation.
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンに含まれるアリール基としては、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。アリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環構造を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環構造としては、ピロール残基、フラン残基、チオフェン残基、インドール残基、ベンゾフラン残基、及びベンゾチオフェン残基等が挙げられる。アリールスルホニウムカチオンが2つ以上のアリール基を有する場合に、2つ以上あるアリール基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンが必要に応じて有しているアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基は、炭素数1~15の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~15の分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は炭素数3~15のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等が挙げられる。
As the aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable. The aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include pyrrole residues, furan residues, thiophene residues, indole residues, benzofuran residues, benzothiophene residues and the like. When the aryl sulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
The alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as needed is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms. Cycloalkyl group is preferable, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
 R201~R203のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば炭素数6~14)、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキルアルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及びフェニルチオ基が挙げられる。
 上記置換基は可能な場合更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基が置換基としてハロゲン原子を有して、トリフルオロメチル基などのハロゲン化アルキル基となっていてもよい。
The aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may independently have an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, carbon number of carbon atoms). 3 to 15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, and phenylthio groups. Be done.
The substituent may further have a substituent when possible, and for example, the alkyl group may have a halogen atom as a substituent and may be an alkyl halide group such as a trifluoromethyl group. ..
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-2)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-2)は、式(ZaI)におけるR201~R203が、それぞれ独立に、芳香環を有さない有機基を表すカチオンである。ここで芳香環とは、ヘテロ原子を含む芳香族環も包含する。
 R201~R203としての芳香環を有さない有機基は、一般的に炭素数1~30であり、炭素数1~20が好ましい。
 R201~R203は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基が好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、又はアルコキシカルボニルメチル基がより好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基が更に好ましい。
Next, the cation (ZaI-2) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring. Here, the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom.
The organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 generally has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and are linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups, 2-oxocycloalkyl groups, or alkoxy groups. A carbonyl methyl group is more preferred, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group is even more preferred.
 R201~R203のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基としては、例えば、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、及びペンチル基)、並びに、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えばシクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及びノルボルニル基)が挙げられる。
 R201~R203は、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~5)、水酸基、シアノ基、又はニトロ基によって更に置換されていてもよい。
Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group). Groups, butyl groups, and pentyl groups), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and norbornyl groups).
R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-3b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-3b)は、下記一般式(ZaI-3b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-3b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-3b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 一般式(ZaI-3b)中、
 R1c~R5cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、シクロアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、ニトロ基、アルキルチオ基、又はアリールチオ基を表す。
 R6c及びR7cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(t-ブチル基等)、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はアリール基を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基を表す。
In the general formula (ZaI-3b),
R 1c to R 5c are independently hydrogen atom, alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkylcarbonyloxy group, cycloalkylcarbonyloxy group, halogen atom, hydroxyl group. , Nitro group, alkylthio group, or arylthio group.
R 6c and R 7c independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (t-butyl group, etc.), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R5cとR6c、R6cとR7c、R5cとR、及びRとRは、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよく、この環は、それぞれ独立に酸素原子、硫黄原子、ケトン基、エステル結合、又はアミド結合を含んでいてもよい。
 上記環としては、芳香族又は非芳香族の炭化水素環、芳香族又は非芳香族のヘテロ環、及びこれらの環が2つ以上組み合わされてなる多環縮合環が挙げられる。環としては、3~10員環が挙げられ、4~8員環が好ましく、5又は6員環がより好ましい。
Any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be combined to form a ring, respectively. , This ring may independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
Examples of the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic fused ring formed by combining two or more of these rings. Examples of the ring include a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R6cとR7c、及びRとRが結合して形成する基としては、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基等のアルキレン基が挙げられる。このアルキレン基中のメチレン基が酸素原子等のヘテロ原子で置換されていてもよい。
 R5cとR6c、及びR5cとRが結合して形成する基としては、単結合又はアルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基としては、メチレン基及びエチレン基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include an alkylene group such as a butylene group and a pentylene group. The methylene group in the alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
As the group formed by bonding R 5c and R 6c , and R 5c and R x , a single bond or an alkylene group is preferable. Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-4b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-4b)は、下記一般式(ZaI-4b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-4b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-4b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 一般式(ZaI-4b)中、
 lは0~2の整数を表す。
 rは0~8の整数を表す。
 R13は、水素原子、フッ素原子、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を有する基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。
 R14は、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、シクロアルキルスルホニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を有する基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。R14は、複数存在する場合はそれぞれ独立して、水酸基等の上記基を表す。
 R15は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はナフチル基を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成するとき、環骨格内に、酸素原子、又は窒素原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでもよい。一態様において、2つのR15がアルキレン基であり、互いに結合して環構造を形成するのが好ましい。
In the general formula (ZaI-4b),
l represents an integer of 0 to 2.
r represents an integer from 0 to 8.
R 13 is a group having a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be used, and a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). May be). These groups may have substituents.
R 14 is a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group having a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be a cycloalkyl group). It may be a group containing a part of). These groups may have substituents. When a plurality of R 14 are present, each independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. These groups may have substituents. Bonded to two R 15 each other may form a ring. When two R 15 are combined to form a ring together, in the ring skeleton may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, or a nitrogen atom. In one embodiment, two R 15 is an alkylene group, preferably bonded together to form a ring structure.
 一般式(ZaI-4b)において、R13、R14、及びR15のアルキル基は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状である。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。アルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-ブチル基、又はt-ブチル基等がより好ましい。 In the general formula (ZaI-4b), the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 are linear or branched chain. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. As the alkyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group and the like are more preferable.
 次に、一般式(ZaII)について説明する。
 一般式(ZaII)中、R204及びR205は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基を表す。
 R204及びR205のアリール基としてはフェニル基、又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。R204及びR205のアリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環を有するアリール基の骨格としては、例えば、ピロール、フラン、チオフェン、インドール、ベンゾフラン、及びベンゾチオフェン等が挙げられる。
 R204及びR205のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、又はペンチル基)、又は炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えばシクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、又はノルボルニル基)が好ましい。
Next, the general formula (ZaII) will be described.
In the general formula (ZaII), R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
As the aryl group of R 204 and R 205, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable. The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.). A butyl group or a pentyl group) or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group) is preferable.
 R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい。R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば炭素数6~15)、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及びフェニルチオ基等が挙げられる。 The aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, 3 to 15 carbon atoms). 15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 15 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, phenylthio groups and the like can be mentioned.
≪化合物(II)≫
 次に、化合物(II)について説明する。
 化合物(II):上記構造部位Xを2つ以上と上記構造部位Yとを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つ以上と上記構造部位Yに由来する上記第2の酸性部位とを含む酸を発生する化合物
 但し、化合物(II)は、下記条件IIを満たす。
 条件II:上記化合物(II)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M 及び上記構造部位Y中のカチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1と、上記構造部位Y中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2を有し、且つ、上記酸解離定数a1よりも上記酸解離定数a2の方が大きい。
 酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2は、上述した方法により求められる。
 ここで、化合物PIIの酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2について、より具体的に説明する。化合物(II)が、例えば、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つと、上記構造部位Yに由来する上記第2の酸性部位を1つ有する酸を発生する化合物である場合、化合物PIIは「2つのHAとHAを有する化合物」に該当する。この化合物PIIの酸解離定数を求めた場合、化合物PIIが「1つのA と1つのHAとHAとを有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a1であり、「2つのA とHAとを有する化合物」が「2つのA とA を有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a2である。つまり、化合物PIIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数を複数有する場合、その最も小さい値を酸解離定数a1とみなす。
≪Compound (II) ≫
Next, compound (II) will be described.
Compound (II): A compound having two or more of the structural sites X and the structural site Y, and having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation. A compound that generates an acid containing the above and the second acidic moiety derived from the structural moiety Y. However, the compound (II) satisfies the following condition II.
Condition II: In the compound (II), the compound PII obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + is contained in the structural site X. The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + is replaced with H + , and the HA obtained by replacing the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety represented by 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
The acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are obtained by the above-mentioned method.
Here, the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PII will be described more specifically. When the compound (II) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one second acidic site derived from the structural site Y. , Compound PII corresponds to "a compound having two HA 1 and HA 2 ". If asked for the acid dissociation constant of the compound PII, compound PII is - a pKa of acid dissociation constant a1 when the "one of A 1 and one HA 1 and HA 2 with a compound of", "two a 1 - and HA 2 compound having the "is" two a 1 - and a 2 - pKa when a compound "having a is an acid dissociation constant a2. That is, when the compound PII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic dissociation constant represented by HA 1 formed by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1.
 また、上記化合物PIIとは、化合物(II)に活性光線又は放射線を照射することにより発生する酸に該当する。
 なお、化合物(II)は、上記構造部位Yを複数有していてもよい。
Further, the compound PII corresponds to an acid generated by irradiating compound (II) with active light or radiation.
In addition, compound (II) may have a plurality of the structural sites Y.
 形成されるパターンのLWR性能がより優れる点で、上記化合物PIIにおいて、酸解離定数a1と上記酸解離定数a2との差は、2.0以上が好ましく、3.0以上がより好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1と上記酸解離定数a2との差の上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、15.0以下である。 In the compound PII, the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. The upper limit of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 15.0 or less.
 また、上記化合物PIIにおいて、酸解離定数a2は、例えば、6.5以下であり、レジスト組成物内での化合物(I)のカチオン部位の安定性がより優れる点で、2.0以下が好ましく、1.0以下がより好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a2の下限値としては、例えば、-3.5以上であり、-2.0以上が好ましい。 Further, in the above compound PII, the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, 6.5 or less, and 2.0 or less is preferable in that the stability of the cation moiety of the compound (I) in the resist composition is more excellent. , 1.0 or less is more preferable. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is, for example, −3.5 or higher, preferably −2.0 or higher.
 また、形成されるパターンのLWR性能がより優れる点で、上記化合物PIIにおいて、酸解離定数a1は、2.0以下が好ましく、0.5以下がより好ましく、-0.1以下が更に好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1の下限値としては、-15.0以上が好ましい。 Further, in the above-mentioned compound PII, the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and further preferably -0.1 or less in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
 化合物(II)としては特に制限されず、例えば、下記一般式(IIa)で表される化合物が挙げられる。 The compound (II) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a compound represented by the following general formula (IIa).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(Ia)中、「M21 21 」及び「A22 22 」は、各々、構造部位X及び構造部位Yに該当する。化合物(IIa)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、下記一般式(IIa-1)で表される酸を発生する。つまり、「M21 21 」は、HA21で表される第1の酸性部位を形成し、「A22 22 」は、上記第1の酸性部位とは異なる構造のHA22で表される第2の酸性部位を形成する。 In the general formula (Ia), "M 21 + A 21 -" and "A 22 - + M 22" each correspond to structural moiety X and the structural moiety Y. The compound (IIa) generates an acid represented by the following general formula (IIa-1) by irradiation with active light rays or radiation. That is, "M 21 + A 21 -" forms a first acidic moiety represented by HA 21, "A 22 - M 22 +" is a structure different from that of the first acid sites HA 22 It forms a second acidic moiety represented by.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(IIa)中、M21 及びM22 は、それぞれ独立に、有機カチオンを表す。
 A21 及びA22 は、それぞれ独立に、アニオン性官能基を表す。但し、A22 は、A21 で表されるアニオン性官能基とは異なる構造を表す。
 Lは、(n1+n2)価の有機基を表す。
 n1は、2以上の整数を表す
 n2は、1以上の整数を表す。
 但し、上記下記一般式(IIa)において、M21 及びM22 で表される有機カチオンをHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIa(上記一般式(IIa-1)で表される化合物に該当する。)において、A22Hで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2は、HA21で表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1よりも大きい。なお、酸解離定数a1と酸解離定数a2の好適値については、上述した通りである。
In the general formula (IIa), + M 21 + and M 22 each independently represents an organic cation.
A 21 - and A 22 - independently represents an anionic functional group. However, A 22 represents a structure different from the anionic functional group represented by A 21 .
L 2 represents a (n1 + n2) valent organic group.
n1 represents an integer of 2 or more, and n2 represents an integer of 1 or more.
However, the following general formula (IIa), corresponds to the compound represented by Compound PIIa comprising replacing organic cation represented by M 21 + and M 22 + to H + (the general formula (IIa-1) ), The acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic moiety represented by A 22 H is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by HA 21 . The preferable values of the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are as described above.
 上記一般式(IIa)中、M21 、M22 、A21 、及びA22 は、各々上述した一般式(Ia)中のM11 、M12 、A11 、及びA12 と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 上記一般式(IIa)中、n1個のM21 同士、n1個のA21 同士は、各々互いに同一の基を表す。
In the general formula (IIa), M 21 +, M 22 +, A 21 -, and A 22 - is in each above-mentioned general formula (Ia) M 11 +, M 12 +, A 11 -, and A 12 - in the above formula, preferred embodiments are also the same.
In the general formula (IIa), n1 pieces of M 21 + each other, n1 pieces of A 21 + each other, represent each mutually identical groups.
 上記一般式(IIa)中、Lで表される(n1+n2)価の有機基としては特に制限されず、例えば、下記(A1)及び下記(A2)で表される基等が挙げられる。なお、下記(A1)及び(A2)中、*のうち少なくとも2個はA21 との結合位置を表し、*のうち少なくとも1個はA22 との結合位置を表す。 In the above general formula (IIa), the (n1 + n2) valent organic group represented by L 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include groups represented by the following (A1) and the following (A2). Incidentally, in the following (A1) and (A2), at least two of * A 21 - represents a bonding position to at least one of * the A 22 - represents a bonding site to the.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 上記(A1)及び(A2)中、Tは、3価の炭化水素環基、又は3価の複素環基を表し、Tは、炭素原子、4価の炭化水素環基、又は4価の複素環基を表す。 In the above (A1) and (A2), T 1 represents a trivalent hydrocarbon ring group or a trivalent heterocyclic group, and T 2 is a carbon atom, a tetravalent hydrocarbon ring group, or a tetravalent. Represents the heterocyclic group of.
 上記炭化水素環基は、芳香族炭化水素環基であっても、脂肪族炭化水素環基であってもよい。上記炭化水素環基に含まれる炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~14がより好ましい。
 上記複素環基は、芳香族複素環基であっても、脂肪族複素環基であってもよい。上記複素環は、少なくとも1つのN原子、O原子、S原子、又はSe原子を環構造内に有する5~10員環であることが好ましく、5~7員環がより好ましく、5~6員環が更に好ましい。
The hydrocarbon ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group. The number of carbon atoms contained in the hydrocarbon ring group is preferably 6 to 18, and more preferably 6 to 14.
The heterocyclic group may be an aromatic heterocyclic group or an aliphatic heterocyclic group. The heterocycle is preferably a 5- to 10-membered ring having at least one N atom, an O atom, an S atom, or a Se atom in the ring structure, more preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring, and a 5- to 6-membered ring. Rings are more preferred.
 また、上記(A1)及び(A2)中、L21及びL22は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 L21及びL22で表される2価の連結基としては、上記一般式(Ia)中のLで表される2価の連結基と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 n1は、2以上の整数を表す。上限は特に制限されないが、例えば、6以下であり、4以下が好ましく、3以下がより好ましい。
 n2は、1以上の整数を表す。上限は特に制限されないが、例えば、3以下であり、2以下が好ましい。
Further, in the above (A1) and (A2), L 21 and L 22 independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, respectively.
The divalent linking group represented by L 21 and L 22 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in the general formula (Ia), and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
n1 represents an integer of 2 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 6 or less, preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
n2 represents an integer of 1 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 3 or less, preferably 2 or less.
≪化合物(III)≫
 次に、化合物(III)について説明する。
 化合物(III):上記構造部位Xを2つ以上と、下記構造部位Zとを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つ以上と上記構造部位Zとを含む酸を発生する化合物
 構造部位Z:酸を中和可能な非イオン性の部位
≪Compound (III) ≫
Next, compound (III) will be described.
Compound (III): A compound having two or more of the structural site X and the following structural site Z, wherein the first acidic site derived from the structural site X is 2 by irradiation with active light or radiation. A compound that generates an acid containing one or more of the above structural site Z Structural site Z: Nonionic site capable of neutralizing the acid
 構造部位Z中の酸を中和可能な非イオン性の有機部位としては特に制限されず、例えば、プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基又は電子を有する官能基を含む部位(好ましくは有機部位)であることが好ましい。
 プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基又は電子を有する官能基としては、環状ポリエーテル等のマクロサイクリック構造を有する官能基、又はπ共役に寄与しない非共有電子対をもった窒素原子を有する官能基等が挙げられる。π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対を有する窒素原子とは、例えば、下記式に示す部分構造を有する窒素原子である。
The nonionic organic moiety capable of neutralizing the acid in the structural moiety Z is not particularly limited, and for example, a moiety containing a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton (preferably organic). Site) is preferable.
As a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton, a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether or a nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to π conjugation is used. Examples thereof include functional groups having. The nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to π conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基又は電子を有する官能基の部分構造としては、例えば、クラウンエーテル構造、アザクラウンエーテル構造、1~3級アミン構造、ピリジン構造、イミダゾール構造、及びピラジン構造等が挙げられ、なかでも、1~3級アミン構造が好ましい。 Substructures of functional groups having groups or electrons that can electrostatically interact with protons include, for example, crown ether structures, aza crown ether structures, 1-3 amine structures, pyridine structures, imidazole structures, and pyrazine structures. Etc., and among them, a primary to tertiary amine structure is preferable.
 上記化合物(III)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIIにおいて、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1は、形成されるパターンのLWR性能がより優れる点で、2.0以下が好ましく、0.5以下がより好ましく、-0.1以下が更に好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1の下限値としては、-15.0以上が好ましい。
 なお、化合物PIIIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数を複数有する場合、その最も小さい値を酸解離定数a1とみなす。
 つまり、化合物(III)が、例えば、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つと上記構造部位Zとを有する酸を発生する化合物である場合、化合物PIIIは「2つのHAを有する化合物」に該当する。この化合物PIIIの酸解離定数を求めた場合、化合物PIIIが「1つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a1である。つまり、化合物PIIIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数を複数有する場合、その最も小さい値を酸解離定数a1とみなす。
 なお、上記化合物(III)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIIとは、例えば、化合物(III)が後述する化合物(IIIa)で表される化合物である場合、HA31-L-N(R2X)-L-A31Hが該当する。
In the compounds PIII which the compound in (III) formed by replacing the cationic sites M 1 + in the structural moiety X to H +, HA 1 comprising substituting the cationic sites M 1 + in the structural moiety X to H + The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic moiety represented by is preferably 2.0 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and further -0.1 or less in that the LWR performance of the formed pattern is more excellent. preferable. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably -15.0 or higher.
When compound PIII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1.
That is, when compound (III) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z, the compound PIII is "two HA 1". It corresponds to "a compound having." If asked for the acid dissociation constant of the compound PIII, compound PIII is - pKa when the "one of A 1 and a compound having one HA 1" is an acid dissociation constant a1. That is, when compound PIII has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + , the smallest value is acid. It is regarded as the dissociation constant a1.
In the compound (III), the compound PIII in which the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X is replaced with H + is, for example, a compound in which the compound (III) is represented by the compound (IIIa) described later. If, HA 31- L 3- N (R 2X ) -L 4- A 31 H corresponds.
 化合物(III)としては特に制限されないが、例えば、下記一般式(IIIa)で表される化合物が挙げられる。 The compound (III) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a compound represented by the following general formula (IIIa).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 一般式(IIIa)中、「M31 31 」は、構造部位Xに該当する。化合物(IIIa)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、HA31-L-N(R2X)-L-A31Hで表される酸を発生する。つまり、「M31 31 」は、HA31で表される第1の酸性部位を形成する。 In the general formula (IIIa), "M 31 + A 31 -" corresponds to the structural moiety X. Compound (IIIa) produces an acid represented by HA 31- L 3- N (R 2X ) -L 4- A 31 H by irradiation with active light or radiation. That is, "M 31 + A 31 -" forms a first acidic moiety represented by HA 31.
 一般式(IIIa)中、M31 は、有機カチオンを表す。
 A31 は、アニオン性官能基を表す。
 L及びLは、それぞれ独立に、2価の連結基を表す。
 R2Xは、1価の置換基を表す。
In the general formula (IIIa), M 31 + represents an organic cation.
A 31 - represents an anionic functional group.
L 3 and L 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group.
R 2X represents a monovalent substituent.
 上記一般式(IIIa)中、M31 、及びA31 は、各々上述した一般式(Ia)中のM11 、及びA11 と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 上記一般式(IIIa)中、L及びLは、各々上述した一般式(Ia)中のLと同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 上記一般式(IIIa)中、2個のM31 同士、及び2個のA31 同士は、各々互いに同一の基を表す。
In the general formula (IIIa), M 31 + and A 31 are synonymous with M 11 + and A 11 in the general formula (Ia) described above, respectively, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
In the general formula (IIIa), L 3 and L 4 are synonymous with L 1 in the general formula (Ia) described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
In the general formula (IIIa), two M 31 + each other, and two A 31 - each other, represent each mutually identical groups.
 一般式(IIIa)中、R2Xで表される1価の置換基としては特に制限されず、例えば、-CH-が、-CO-、-NH-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、及び-SO-よりなる群より選ばれる1種又は2種以上の組み合わせで置換されていてもよい、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10。直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~15)、又はアルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~6)等が挙げられる。
 また、上記アルキレン基、上記シクロアルキレン基、及び上記アルケニレン基は、置換基で置換されていてもよい。
In the general formula (IIIa), the monovalent substituent represented by R 2X is not particularly limited, and for example, -CH 2- is -CO-, -NH-, -O-, -S-,-. SO-, and -SO 2 - may be substituted with one or more combinations selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group (preferably may be 1-10 either linear or branched carbon atoms. ), Cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), alkenyl group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and the like.
Further, the alkylene group, the cycloalkylene group, and the alkenylene group may be substituted with a substituent.
 上記化合物(I)~(III)で表される化合物の分子量は300以上3000未満が好ましく、500~2000がより好ましく、700~1500が更に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the compounds represented by the compounds (I) to (III) is preferably 300 or more and less than 3000, more preferably 500 to 2000, and even more preferably 700 to 1500.
 以下に、上記化合物(I)~(III)で表される化合物の好ましい例を示す。 The following are preferable examples of the compounds represented by the above compounds (I) to (III).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(その他の光酸発生剤)
 特定レジスト組成物が含み得る、特定光酸発生剤以外のその他の光酸発生剤としては、特に制限されない。その他の光酸発生剤としては、例えば、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号明細書の段落[0125]~[0319]、米国特許出願公開2015/0004544A1号明細書の段落[0086]~[0094]、米国特許出願公開2016/0237190A1号明細書の段落[0323]~[0402]、並びに、特開2018-155788号明細書の段落[0074]~[0122]及び[0137]~[0146]に開示された公知の化合物を好適に使用できる。
(Other photoacid generators)
The specific resist composition may contain no particular limitation as other photoacid generators other than the specific photoacid generator. Examples of other photoacid generators include paragraphs [0125] to [0319] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1 and paragraphs [0083] to [0094] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0004544A1. , U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0237190A1, paragraphs [0323] to [0402], and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-155788, disclosed in paragraphs [0074] to [0122] and [0137] to [0146]. The known compound described above can be preferably used.
 特定レジスト組成物がその他の光酸発生剤を含む場合、その他の光酸発生剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~10.0質量%が好ましい。
 上記その他の光酸発生剤は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
When the specific resist composition contains other photoacid generators, the content of the other photoacid generators is preferably 0.1 to 10.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
The above other photoacid generators may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total content thereof is preferably within the above-mentioned suitable content range.
<酸分解性樹脂(樹脂(A))>
 特定レジスト組成物は、酸の作用により分解して極性が増大する樹脂(以下、「酸分解性樹脂」又は「樹脂(A)」ともいう)を含む。
 つまり、本発明のパターン形成方法において、典型的には、現像液としてアルカリ現像液を採用した場合には、ポジ型パターンが好適に形成され、現像液として有機系現像液を採用した場合には、ネガ型パターンが好適に形成される。
 樹脂(A)は、通常、酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基(以下、「酸分解性基」ともいう)を含み、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
<Acid-degradable resin (resin (A))>
The specific resist composition contains a resin (hereinafter, also referred to as "acid-decomposable resin" or "resin (A)") which is decomposed by the action of an acid to increase the polarity.
That is, in the pattern forming method of the present invention, typically, when an alkaline developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed, and when an organic developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed. , A negative pattern is preferably formed.
The resin (A) usually contains a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid and whose polarity is increased (hereinafter, also referred to as “acid-degradable group”), and preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
≪酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位≫
 酸分解性基とは、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基をいう。酸分解性基は、酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造を有することが好ましい。つまり、樹脂(A)は、酸の作用により分解し、極性基を生じる基を有する繰り返し単位を有する。この繰り返し単位を有する樹脂は、酸の作用により極性が増大してアルカリ現像液に対する溶解度が増大し、有機溶剤に対する溶解度が減少する。
 極性基としては、アルカリ可溶性基が好ましく、例えば、カルボキシル基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド基、トリス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基等の酸性基、並びにアルコール性水酸基等が挙げられる。
 なかでも、極性基としては、カルボキシル基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、又はスルホン酸基が好ましい。
≪Repeating unit with acid-degradable group≫
The acid-degradable group refers to a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to form a polar group. The acid-degradable group preferably has a structure in which the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid. That is, the resin (A) has a repeating unit having a group which is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group. The polarity of the resin having this repeating unit is increased by the action of the acid, the solubility in the alkaline developer is increased, and the solubility in the organic solvent is decreased.
As the polar group, an alkali-soluble group is preferable, and for example, a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) methylene. Group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) imide group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) imide group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide group, tris (alkylcarbonyl) Examples thereof include an acidic group such as a methylene group and a tris (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, and an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
Among them, as the polar group, a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group is preferable.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基としては、例えば、式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基が挙げられる。
式(Y1):-C(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y3):-C(R36)(R37)(OR38
式(Y4):-C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
Examples of the leaving group that are eliminated by the action of an acid include groups represented by the formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
Equation (Y1): -C (Rx 1 ) (Rx 2 ) (Rx 3 )
Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC (Rx 1 ) (Rx 2 ) (Rx 3 )
Equation (Y3): -C (R 36 ) (R 37 ) (OR 38 )
Formula (Y4): -C (Rn) (H) (Ar)
 式(Y1)及び式(Y2)中、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)又はシクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又はアリール基(単環若しくは多環)を表す。なお、Rx~Rxの全てがアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx~Rxのうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。
 なかでも、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基を表すことが好ましく、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状のアルキル基を表すことがより好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して、単環又は多環を形成してもよい。
 Rx~Rxのアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及びt-ブチル基等の炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのアリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、及びアントリル基等が挙げられる。
 Rx~Rxのアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又はノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基、又はビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 式(Y1)又は式(Y2)で表される基は、例えば、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
In formulas (Y1) and (Y2), Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), and alkenyl groups (straight chain). (Orchid or branched chain), or aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). When all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
Among them, Rx 1 to Rx 3 preferably independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group, and Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear alkyl group. Is more preferable.
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be combined to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring.
As the alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 , an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group is preferable. ..
Examples of the cycloalkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and a polycyclic ring such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. Cycloalkyl group is preferred.
As the aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3, an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
As the alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 , a vinyl group is preferable.
A cycloalkyl group is preferable as the ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 . The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl. A polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group or an adamantyl group is preferable, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a base. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
The group represented by the formula (Y1) or the formula (Y2) is, for example, an embodiment in which Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group. Is preferable.
 式(Y3)中、R36~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。R37とR38とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。1価の有機基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基等が挙げられる。R36は水素原子であることも好ましい。
 なお、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基には、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基が含まれていてもよい。例えば、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つ以上が、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 また、R38は、繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基と互いに結合して、環を形成してもよい。R38と繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基とが互いに結合して形成する基は、メチレン基等のアルキレン基が好ましい。
In formula (Y3), R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring. Examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom and / or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group. For example, in the above alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group, for example, one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and / or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. May be good.
Further, R 38 may be bonded to each other with another substituent contained in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring. The group formed by bonding R 38 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
 式(Y3)としては、下記式(Y3-1)で表される基が好ましい。 As the formula (Y3), a group represented by the following formula (Y3-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 ここで、L及びLは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキル基とアリール基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
 Mは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Qは、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいシクロアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアリール基、アミノ基、アンモニウム基、メルカプト基、シアノ基、アルデヒド基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキル基とシクロアルキル基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
 アルキル基及びシクロアルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 なお、L及びLのうち一方は水素原子であり、他方はアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、又はアルキレン基とアリール基とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましい。
 Q、M、及びLの少なくとも2つが結合して環(好ましくは、5員若しくは6員環)を形成してもよい。
 パターンの微細化の点では、Lが2級又は3級アルキル基であることが好ましく、3級アルキル基であることがより好ましい。2級アルキル基としては、イソプロピル基、シクロヘキシル基又はノルボルニル基が挙げられ、3級アルキル基としては、tert-ブチル基又はアダマンタン基が挙げられる。これらの態様では、Tg(ガラス転移温度)及び活性化エネルギーが高くなるため、膜強度の担保に加え、かぶりの抑制ができる。
Here, L 1 and L 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and an aryl group are combined).
M represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Q is an alkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, a cycloalkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, an aryl group that may contain a hetero atom, an amino group, an ammonium group, a mercapto group, a cyano group, and an aldehyde. Represents a group or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group are combined).
In the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group, for example, one of the methylene groups may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
It is preferable that one of L 1 and L 2 is a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which an alkylene group and an aryl group are combined.
Q, M, and at least two members to the ring (preferably, 5-membered or 6-membered ring) L 1 may be formed.
From the viewpoint of pattern miniaturization, L 2 is preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group, and more preferably a tertiary alkyl group. Examples of the secondary alkyl group include an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a norbornyl group, and examples of the tertiary alkyl group include a tert-butyl group and an adamantan group. In these aspects, since Tg (glass transition temperature) and activation energy are high, fog can be suppressed in addition to ensuring the film strength.
 式(Y4)中、Arは、芳香環基を表す。Rnは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。RnとArとは互いに結合して非芳香族環を形成してもよい。Arはより好ましくはアリール基である。 In the formula (Y4), Ar represents an aromatic ring group. Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. Rn and Ar may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring. Ar is more preferably an aryl group.
 繰り返し単位の酸分解性が優れる点から、極性基を保護する脱離基において、極性基(又はその残基)に非芳香族環が直接結合している場合、上記非芳香族環中の、上記極性基(又はその残基)と直接結合している環員原子に隣接する環員原子は、置換基としてフッ素原子等のハロゲン原子を有さないのも好ましい。 In the desorbing group that protects the polar group, when the non-aromatic ring is directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue), in the non-aromatic ring, from the viewpoint of excellent acid decomposition property of the repeating unit, It is also preferable that the ring member atom adjacent to the ring member atom directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基は、他にも、3-メチル-2-シクロペンテニル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有する2-シクロペンテニル基、及び、1,1,4,4-テトラメチルシクロヘキシル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有するシクロヘキシル基でもよい。 Other desorbing groups eliminated by the action of an acid include a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, and 1,1,4. , A cyclohexyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as 4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group may be used.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位も好ましい。 As the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group, the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 Lは、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい2価の連結基を表し、Rは水素原子、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、Rは酸の作用によって脱離し、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい脱離基を表す。ただし、L、R、及びRのうち少なくとも1つは、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する。
 Lは、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい2価の連結基を表す。フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい2価の連結基としては、-CO-、-O-、-S―、-SO-、―SO-、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アリーレン基等)、及びこれらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられる。なかでも、Lとしては、-CO-、又は-アリーレン基-フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有するアルキレン基-が好ましい。
 アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基が好ましい。
 アルキレン基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であってもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有するアルキレン基に含まれるフッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の合計数は特に制限されないが、2以上が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、3~6が更に好ましい。
L 1 represents a divalent linking group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and R 1 is an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. , Or an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and R 2 represents a desorbing group which is eliminated by the action of an acid and may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. However, at least one of L 1 , R 1 , and R 2 has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
L 1 represents a divalent linking group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. The fluorine atom or a linking group may divalent have a iodine atom, -CO -, - O -, - S -, - SO -, - SO 2 -, have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom Examples thereof include a hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, etc.), and a linking group in which a plurality of these are linked. Among them, as the L 1, -CO-, or - arylene - fluorine atom or an alkylene group having iodine atom - are preferred.
As the arylene group, a phenylene group is preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear or branched chain. The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is not particularly limited, but 1 to 10 is preferable, and 1 to 3 is more preferable.
The total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms contained in the alkylene group having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 3 to 6.
 Rは、水素原子、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子が有していてもよいアルキル基、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 アルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有するアルキル基に含まれるフッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の合計数は特に制限されないが、1以上が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、ハロゲン原子以外の酸素原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい。
R 1 represents an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but 1 to 10 is preferable, and 1 to 3 is more preferable.
The total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms contained in the alkyl group having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
The alkyl group may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom other than the halogen atom.
 Rは、酸の作用によって脱離し、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい脱離基を表す。
 なかでも、脱離基としては、式(Z1)~(Z4)で表される基が挙げられる。
式(Z1):-C(Rx11)(Rx12)(Rx13
式(Z2):-C(=O)OC(Rx11)(Rx12)(Rx13
式(Z3):-C(R136)(R137)(OR138
式(Z4):-C(Rn)(H)(Ar
R 2 represents a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid and may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
Among them, examples of the leaving group include groups represented by the formulas (Z1) to (Z4).
Equation (Z1): -C (Rx 11 ) (Rx 12 ) (Rx 13 )
Equation (Z2): -C (= O) OC (Rx 11 ) (Rx 12 ) (Rx 13 )
Equation (Z3): -C (R 136 ) (R 137 ) (OR 138 )
Equation (Z4): -C (Rn 1 ) (H) (Ar 1 )
 式(Z1)、(Z2)中、Rx11~Rx13は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基(単環若しくは多環)を表す。なお、Rx11~Rx13の全てがアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx11~Rx13のうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。
 Rx11~Rx13は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい点以外は、上述した(Y1)、(Y2)中のRx~Rxと同じであり、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、及びアリール基の定義及び好適範囲と同じである。
In formulas (Z1) and (Z2), Rx 11 to Rx 13 are alkyl groups (linear or branched), fluorine atoms or iodine atoms which may independently have fluorine atoms or iodine atoms, respectively. It has a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic) that may have a fluorine atom or an alkenyl group that may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom (linear or branched chain), or a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic) which may be used. When all of Rx 11 to Rx 13 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 11 to Rx 13 are methyl groups.
Rx 11 to Rx 13 are the same as Rx 1 to Rx 3 in (Y1) and (Y2) described above, except that they may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and are an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group. , Alkyl group, and aryl group are the same as the definition and preferred range.
 式(Z3)中、R136~R138は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい1価の有機基を表す。R137とR138とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい1価の有機基としては、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアラルキル基、及びこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキル基とシクロアルキル基とを組み合わせた基)が挙げられる。
 なお、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基には、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子以外に、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子が含まれていてもよい。つまり、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 また、R138は、繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基と互いに結合して、環を形成してもよい。この場合、R138と繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基とが互いに結合して形成する基は、メチレン基等のアルキレン基が好ましい。
In the formula (Z3), R 136 to R 138 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. R 137 and R 138 may be combined with each other to form a ring. The monovalent organic group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom includes an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. , An aryl group that may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aralkyl group that may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and a group that combines these (for example, an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group are combined. Group).
The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom in addition to the fluorine atom and the iodine atom. That is, the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may be replaced with, for example, one of the methylene groups by a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group.
Further, R 138 may be bonded to each other with another substituent contained in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring. In this case, the group formed by bonding R 138 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
 式(Z3)としては、下記式(Z3-1)で表される基が好ましい。 As the formula (Z3), a group represented by the following formula (Z3-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 ここで、L11及びL12は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子;フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよいアルキル基;フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基;フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよいアリール基;又はこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよい、アルキル基とシクロアルキル基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
 Mは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Qは、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよいアルキル基;フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基;フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるアリール基;アミノ基;アンモニウム基;メルカプト基;シアノ基;アルデヒド基;又はこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選択されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよい、アルキル基とシクロアルキル基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
Here, L 11 and L 12 may independently have a hydrogen atom; a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom; a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an alkyl group. A cycloalkyl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of oxygen atoms; an aryl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom; or It represents a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group are combined, which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom).
M 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Q 1 represents a fluorine atom, an alkyl group which may have a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of iodine atoms and an oxygen atom; Yes fluorine atom, a hetero atom selected from the group consisting of iodine atoms and an oxygen atom May be cycloalkyl group; aryl group selected from the group consisting of fluorine atom, iodine atom and oxygen atom; amino group; ammonium group; mercapto group; cyano group; aldehyde group; or a group combining these (for example). , A group combining an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group, which may have a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom, an iodine atom and an oxygen atom).
 式(Y4)中、Arは、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい芳香環基を表す。Rnは、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。RnとArとは互いに結合して非芳香族環を形成してもよい。 In formula (Y4), Ar 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Rn 1 is an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents. Rn 1 and Ar 1 may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、一般式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位も好ましい。 As the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group, a repeating unit represented by the general formula (AI) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 一般式(AI)において、
 Xaは、水素原子、又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。
 Tは、単結合、又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状、又は分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又はアリール(単環若しくは多環)基を表す。ただし、Rx~Rxの全てがアルキル基(直鎖状、又は分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx~Rxのうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して、単環又は多環(単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基等)を形成してもよい。
In the general formula (AI)
Xa 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), alkenyl groups (linear or branched chain), or aryl (linear or branched chain). Represents a monocyclic or polycyclic) group. However, when all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic (monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group, etc.).
 Xaにより表される、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基又は-CH-R11で表される基が挙げられる。R11は、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子等)、水酸基又は1価の有機基を表し、例えば、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよい炭素数5以下のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよい炭素数5以下のアシル基、及びハロゲン原子が置換していてもよい炭素数5以下のアルコキシ基が挙げられ、炭素数3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。Xaとしては、水素原子、メチル基、トリフルオロメチル基、又はヒドロキシメチル基が好ましい。 Represented by xa 1, as the alkyl group which may have a substituent group, include groups represented by methyl group or -CH 2 -R 11. R 11 represents a halogen atom (fluorine atom, etc.), a hydroxyl group, or a monovalent organic group. For example, the halogen atom may be substituted, an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms, or a halogen atom may be substituted. Examples thereof include an acyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms and an alkoxy group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an alkyl group having 3 or less carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable. As Xa 1 , a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a hydroxymethyl group is preferable.
 Tの2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、芳香環基、-COO-Rt-基、及び-O-Rt-基等が挙げられる。式中、Rtは、アルキレン基、又はシクロアルキレン基を表す。
 Tは、単結合又は-COO-Rt-基が好ましい。Tが-COO-Rt-基を表す場合、Rtは、炭素数1~5のアルキレン基が好ましく、-CH-基、-(CH-基、又は-(CH-基がより好ましい。
Examples of the divalent linking group of T include an alkylene group, an aromatic ring group, an -COO-Rt- group, and an -O-Rt- group. In the formula, Rt represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group.
T is preferably a single bond or a -COO-Rt- group. When T represents a -COO-Rt- group, Rt is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and is preferably a -CH 2- group,- (CH 2 ) 2- group, or- (CH 2 ) 3- group. Is more preferable.
 Rx~Rxのアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及びt-ブチル基等の炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又はノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのアリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、及びアントリル基等が挙げられる。
 Rx~Rxのアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、その他にも、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。なかでも、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基、又はビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 一般式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位は、例えば、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
As the alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 , an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group is preferable. ..
Examples of the cycloalkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. Cycloalkyl group is preferred.
As the aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3, an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
As the alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 , a vinyl group is preferable.
As the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 , a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group is preferable, and in addition, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, and the like. Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a tetracyclododecanyl group and an adamantyl group are preferred. Of these, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a base. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
As the repeating unit represented by the general formula (AI), for example, it is preferable that Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
 上記各基が置換基を有する場合、置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(炭素数1~4)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、アルコキシ基(炭素数1~4)、カルボキシル基、及びアルコキシカルボニル基(炭素数2~6)等が挙げられる。置換基中の炭素数は、8以下が好ましい。 When each of the above groups has a substituent, the substituents include, for example, an alkyl group (1 to 4 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group (1 to 4 carbon atoms), a carboxyl group, and an alkoxycarbonyl group (1 to 4 carbon atoms). Examples thereof include 2 to 6 carbon atoms). The number of carbon atoms in the substituent is preferably 8 or less.
 一般式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位としては、好ましくは、酸分解性(メタ)アクリル酸3級アルキルエステル系繰り返し単位(Xaが水素原子又はメチル基を表し、且つ、Tが単結合を表す繰り返し単位)である。 The repeating unit represented by the general formula (AI) is preferably an acid-decomposable (meth) acrylic acid tertiary alkyl ester-based repeating unit (Xa 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and T is a single bond. It is a repeating unit that represents.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対し、15モル%以上が好ましく、20モル%以上がより好ましく、30モル%以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、80モル%以下が好ましく、70モル%以下がより好ましく、60モル%以下が特に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group is preferably 15 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, still more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 80 mol% or less, more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明は、これに限定されるものではない。なお、式中、XaはH、CH、CF、及びCHOHのいずれか、Rxa及びRxbはそれぞれ炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基を表す。 Specific examples of the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the formula, Xa 1 represents any of H, CH 3 , CF 3 , and CH 2 OH, and Rxa and Rxb represent linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, respectively.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 樹脂(A)は、上述した繰り返し単位以外の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
 例えば、樹脂(A)は、以下のA群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位、及び/又は以下のB群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
A群:以下の(20)~(29)の繰り返し単位からなる群。
(20)後述する、酸基を有する繰り返し単位
(21)後述する、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位
(22)後述する、ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位
(23)後述する、光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位
(24)後述する、一般式(V-1)又は下記一般式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位
(25)後述する、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位
(26)後述する、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位
(27)後述する、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位
(28)後述する、式(D)で表される繰り返し単位
(29)後述する、式(E)で表される繰り返し単位
B群:以下の(30)~(32)の繰り返し単位からなる群。
(30)後述する、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位
(31)後述する、脂環炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位
(32)後述する、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、一般式(III)で表される繰り返し単位
The resin (A) may contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit described above.
For example, the resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the following groups A and / or at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the following groups B. May be good.
Group A: A group consisting of the following repeating units (20) to (29).
(20) Repeating unit having an acid group described later (21) Repeating unit having a fluorine atom or iodine atom described later (22) Repeating unit having a lactone group, sulton group or carbonate group described later (23) The repeating unit having a photoacid generating group (24), which will be described later, is represented by the general formula (V-1) or the following general formula (V-2), and the repeating unit (25), which will be described later, is represented by the formula (A). The repeating unit (26) described later, the repeating unit represented by the formula (B) (27) described later, the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) (28) represented by the formula (D) described later. Repeating unit (29) The repeating unit B group represented by the formula (E), which will be described later: A group consisting of the following repeating units (30) to (32).
(30) A repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group, which will be described later. (31) The alicyclic hydrocarbon structure described later. , Repetitive unit showing no acid decomposition property (32) A repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group, which will be described later.
 特定レジスト組成物がEUV用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)は上記A群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 また、特定レジスト組成物がEUV用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)は、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。樹脂(A)がフッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の両方を含む場合、樹脂(A)は、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の両方を含む1つの繰り返し単位を有していてもよいし、樹脂(A)は、フッ素原子を有する繰り返し単位とヨウ素原子を含む繰り返し単位との2種を含んでいてもよい。
 また、特定レジスト組成物がEUV用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)が、芳香族基を有する繰り返し単位を有するのも好ましい。
 特定レジスト組成物がArF用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)は上記B群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 なお、特定レジスト組成物がArF用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)は、フッ素原子及び珪素原子のいずれも含まないことが好ましい。
 また、特定レジスト組成物がArF用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合、樹脂(A)は、芳香族基を有さないことが好ましい。
When the specific resist composition is used as a resist composition for EUV, the resin (A) preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the above group A.
When the specific resist composition is used as a resist composition for EUV, the resin (A) preferably contains at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom. When the resin (A) contains both a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, the resin (A) may have one repeating unit containing both a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, and the resin (A) may have one repeating unit. It may contain two kinds of a repeating unit having a fluorine atom and a repeating unit containing an iodine atom.
Further, when the specific resist composition is used as a resist composition for EUV, it is also preferable that the resin (A) has a repeating unit having an aromatic group.
When the specific resist composition is used as the resist composition for ArF, the resin (A) preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the above group B.
When the specific resist composition is used as the resist composition for ArF, it is preferable that the resin (A) does not contain either a fluorine atom or a silicon atom.
Further, when the specific resist composition is used as the resist composition for ArF, it is preferable that the resin (A) does not have an aromatic group.
≪酸基を有する繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 酸基としては、pKaが13以下の酸基が好ましい。
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、スルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基、又はイソプロパノール基等が好ましい。
 また、上記ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基は、フッ素原子の1つ以上(好ましくは1~2つ)が、フッ素原子以外の基(アルコキシカルボニル基等)で置換されてもよい。このように形成された-C(CF)(OH)-CF-も、酸基として好ましい。また、フッ素原子の1つ以上がフッ素原子以外の基に置換されて、-C(CF)(OH)-CF-を含む環を形成してもよい。
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位は、上述の酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造を有する繰り返し単位、及び後述するラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位とは異なる繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。
≪Repeating unit with acid group≫
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an acid group.
As the acid group, an acid group having a pKa of 13 or less is preferable.
As the acid group, for example, a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, an isopropanol group and the like are preferable.
Further, in the hexafluoroisopropanol group, one or more (preferably one or two) fluorine atoms may be substituted with a group other than the fluorine atom (alkoxycarbonyl group or the like). -C (CF 3 ) (OH) -CF 2- thus formed is also preferable as an acid group. Further, one or more of the fluorine atoms may be substituted with a group other than the fluorine atom to form a ring containing −C (CF 3 ) (OH) −CF 2- .
The repeating unit having an acid group includes a repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected by a leaving group desorbed by the action of the above-mentioned acid, and a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sulton group, or a carbonate group described later. Is preferably a different repeating unit.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい。 The repeating unit having an acid group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 As the repeating unit having an acid group, the repeating unit represented by the formula (B) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 Rは、水素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい1価の有機基を表す。
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい1価の有機基としては、-L-Rで表される基が好ましい。Lは、単結合、又はエステル基を表す。Rは、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
Examples of the fluorine atom or an organic group may monovalent optionally having iodine atom, a group represented by -L 4 -R 8 are preferred. L 4 represents a single bond or an ester group. R 8 is an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, Alternatively, a group combining these can be mentioned.
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。 R 4 and R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
 Lは、単結合、又はエステル基を表す。
 Lは、(n+m+1)価の芳香族炭化水素環基、又は(n+m+1)価の脂環式炭化水素環基を表す。芳香族炭化水素環基としては、ベンゼン環基、及びナフタレン環基が挙げられる。脂環式炭化水素環基としては、単環であっても、多環であってもよく、例えば、シクロアルキル環基が挙げられる。
 Rは、水酸基、又はフッ素化アルコール基(好ましくは、ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)を表す。なお、Rが水酸基の場合、Lは(n+m+1)価の芳香族炭化水素環基であることが好ましい。
 Rは、ハロゲン原子を表す。ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、又はヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 mは、1以上の整数を表す。mは、1~3の整数が好ましく、1~2の整数が好ましい。
 nは、0又は1以上の整数を表す。nは、1~4の整数が好ましい。
 なお、(n+m+1)は、1~5の整数が好ましい。
L 2 represents a single bond or an ester group.
L 3 represents a (n + m + 1) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or a (n + m + 1) -valent alicyclic hydrocarbon ring group. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring group and a naphthalene ring group. The alicyclic hydrocarbon ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and examples thereof include a cycloalkyl ring group.
R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group). When R 6 is a hydroxyl group, L 3 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group having a (n + m + 1) valence.
R 7 represents a halogen atom. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 1 or more. For m, an integer of 1 to 3 is preferable, and an integer of 1 to 2 is preferable.
n represents an integer of 0 or 1 or more. n is preferably an integer of 1 to 4.
In addition, (n + m + 1) is preferably an integer of 1 to 5.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記一般式(I)で表される繰り返し単位も好ましい。 As the repeating unit having an acid group, a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (I) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 一般式(I)中、
 R41、R42及びR43は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基又はアルコキシカルボニル基を表す。但し、R42はArと結合して環を形成していてもよく、その場合のR42は単結合又はアルキレン基を表す。
 Xは、単結合、-COO-、又は-CONR64-を表し、R64は、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。
 Lは、単結合又はアルキレン基を表す。
 Arは、(n+1)価の芳香環基を表し、R42と結合して環を形成する場合には(n+2)価の芳香環基を表す。
 nは、1~5の整数を表す。
In general formula (I),
R 41 , R 42 and R 43 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group or an alkoxycarbonyl group. However, R 42 may be bonded to Ar 4 to form a ring, in which case R 42 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
X 4 represents a single bond, -COO-, or -CONR 64- , and R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
L 4 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group, and represents an (n + 2) -valent aromatic ring group when combined with R 42 to form a ring.
n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
 一般式(I)におけるR41、R42、及びR43のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びドデシル基等の炭素数20以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数8以下のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数3以下のアルキル基が更に好ましい。 The alkyl groups of R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 in the general formula (I) include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, and 2-ethylhexyl group. , An alkyl group having 20 or less carbon atoms such as an octyl group and a dodecyl group is preferable, an alkyl group having 8 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 3 or less carbon atoms is further preferable.
 一般式(I)におけるR41、R42、及びR43のシクロアルキル基としては、単環型でも、多環型でもよい。なかでも、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の炭素数3~8個で単環型のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 一般式(I)におけるR41、R42、及びR43のハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。
 一般式(I)におけるR41、R42、及びR43のアルコキシカルボニル基に含まれるアルキル基としては、上記R41、R42、R43におけるアルキル基と同様のものが好ましい。
The cycloalkyl groups of R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 in the general formula (I) may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Of these, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms such as a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group is preferable.
Examples of the halogen atoms of R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 in the general formula (I) include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is preferable.
The alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group of R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 in the general formula (I) is preferably the same as the alkyl group in R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 .
 上記各基における好ましい置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アミノ基、アミド基、ウレイド基、ウレタン基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、チオエーテル基、アシル基、アシロキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、及びニトロ基が挙げられる。置換基の炭素数は8以下が好ましい。 Preferred substituents in each of the above groups include, for example, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an amide group, a ureido group, a urethane group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a thioether group and an acyl group. , Achilloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, cyano group, and nitro group. The substituent preferably has 8 or less carbon atoms.
 Arは、(n+1)価の芳香環基を表す。nが1である場合における2価の芳香環基は、例えば、フェニレン基、トリレン基、ナフチレン基、及びアントラセニレン基等の炭素数6~18のアリーレン基、又はチオフェン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾピロール環、トリアジン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、及びチアゾール環等のヘテロ環を含む2価の芳香環基が好ましい。なお、上記芳香環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。 Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group. The divalent aromatic ring group when n is 1, for example, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a phenylene group, a trilene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group, or a thiophene ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, and the like. A divalent aromatic ring group containing a heterocycle such as a benzothiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzopyrol ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a triazole ring, a thiaziazole ring, and a thiazole ring is preferable. The aromatic ring group may have a substituent.
 nが2以上の整数である場合における(n+1)価の芳香環基の具体例としては、2価の芳香環基の上記した具体例から、(n-1)個の任意の水素原子を除してなる基が挙げられる。
 (n+1)価の芳香環基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。
As a specific example of the (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group when n is an integer of 2 or more, (n-1) arbitrary hydrogen atoms are removed from the above-mentioned specific example of the divalent aromatic ring group. The group that consists of
The (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
 上述したアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキレン基、及び(n+1)価の芳香環基が有し得る置換基としては、例えば、一般式(I)におけるR41、R42、及びR43で挙げたアルキル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ヒドロキシエトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ヒドロキシプロポキシ基、及びブトキシ基等のアルコキシ基;フェニル基等のアリール基;等が挙げられる。
 Xにより表される-CONR64-(R64は、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す)におけるR64のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びドデシル基等の炭素数20以下のアルキル基が挙げられ、炭素数8以下のアルキル基が好ましい。
 Xとしては、単結合、-COO-、又は-CONH-が好ましく、単結合、又は-COO-がより好ましい。
Examples of the substituents that the above-mentioned alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkylene group, and (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group can have include R 41 , R 42 , and R in the general formula (I). Examples thereof include an alkoxy group such as an alkyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a hydroxyethoxy group, a propoxy group, a hydroxypropoxy group, and a butoxy group described in 43 ; an aryl group such as a phenyl group; and the like.
-CONR 64 represented by X 4 - (R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group) The alkyl group for R 64 in, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, n- butyl group, sec Examples thereof include alkyl groups having 20 or less carbon atoms such as a butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, an octyl group, and a dodecyl group, and an alkyl group having 8 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
As X 4 , a single bond, -COO-, or -CONH- is preferable, and a single bond, or -COO- is more preferable.
 Lにおけるアルキレン基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ヘキシレン基、及びオクチレン基等の炭素数1~8のアルキレン基が好ましい。
 Arとしては、炭素数6~18の芳香環基が好ましく、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、及びビフェニレン環基がより好ましい。
 一般式(I)で表される繰り返し単位は、ヒドロキシスチレン構造を備えていることが好ましい。即ち、Arは、ベンゼン環基であることが好ましい。
The alkylene group for L 4, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as hexylene, and octylene group.
As Ar 4 , an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and a biphenylene ring group are more preferable.
The repeating unit represented by the general formula (I) preferably has a hydroxystyrene structure. That is, Ar 4 is preferably a benzene ring group.
 一般式(I)で表される繰り返し単位としては、下記一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 As the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I), the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 一般式(1)中、
 Aは水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、又はシアノ基を表す。
 Rは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、アルキルスルホニルオキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基又はアリールオキシカルボニル基を表し、複数個ある場合には同じであっても異なっていてもよい。複数のRを有する場合には、互いに共同して環を形成していてもよい。Rとしては水素原子が好ましい。
 aは1~3の整数を表す。
 bは0~(5-a)の整数を表す。
In general formula (1),
A represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
R represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, and there are a plurality of them. In some cases, they may be the same or different. When it has a plurality of Rs, they may form a ring jointly with each other. A hydrogen atom is preferable as R.
a represents an integer of 1 to 3.
b represents an integer from 0 to (5-a).
 以下、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。式中、aは1又は2を表す。 Hereinafter, repeating units having an acid group will be exemplified below. In the formula, a represents 1 or 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 なお、上記繰り返し単位のなかでも、以下に具体的に記載する繰り返し単位が好ましい。式中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、aは2又は3を表す。 Among the above repeating units, the repeating units specifically described below are preferable. In the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a represents 2 or 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対し、10モル%以上が好ましく、15モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、70モル%以下が好ましく、65モル%以下がより好ましく、60モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 15 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 65 mol% or less, and even more preferably 60 mol% or less.
≪フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、上述した≪酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位≫及び≪酸基を有する繰り返し単位≫とは別に、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。また、ここで言う≪フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位≫は、後述の≪ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位≫、及び≪光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位≫等の、A群に属する他の種類の繰り返し単位とは異なるのが好ましい。
≪Repeating unit with fluorine atom or iodine atom≫
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, in addition to the above-mentioned << repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and << repeating unit having an acid group >>. Further, the << repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom >> referred to here is a << repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group >>, << a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group >>, etc., which will be described later. It is preferably different from other types of repeating units belonging to group A.
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 As the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 Lは、単結合、又はエステル基を表す。
 Rは、水素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。
 R10は、水素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。
L 5 represents a single bond or an ester group.
R 9 represents an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
R 10 may have an alkyl group which may have a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents an aryl group or a group in which these are combined.
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。 The repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対し、0モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましく、10モル%以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、50モル%以下が好ましく、45モル%以下がより好ましく、40モル%以下が更に好ましい。
 なお、上述したように、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位には、≪酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位≫及び≪酸基を有する繰り返し単位≫は含まれないことから、上記フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位の含有量も、≪酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位≫及び≪酸基を有する繰り返し単位≫を除いたフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位の含有量を意図する。
The content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, still more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, still more preferably 40 mol% or less.
As described above, since the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom does not include << repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and << repeating unit having an acid group >>, the above-mentioned fluorine atom or iodine The content of the repeating unit having an atom is also intended to be the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom excluding << repeating unit having an acid-degradable group >> and << repeating unit having an acid group >>.
 樹脂(A)の繰り返し単位のうち、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の少なくとも一方を含む繰り返し単位の合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、20モル%以上が好ましく、30モル%以上がより好ましく、40モル%以上が更に好ましい。上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、100モル%以下である。
 なお、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の少なくとも一方を含む繰り返し単位としては、例えば、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有し、且つ、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有し、且つ、酸基を有する繰り返し単位、及びフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Of the repeating units of the resin (A), the total content of the repeating units containing at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom is preferably 20 mol% or more, preferably 30 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). The above is more preferable, and 40 mol% or more is further preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 mol% or less.
As the repeating unit containing at least one of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, for example, a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom and having an acid-degradable group, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and Repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom can be mentioned.
≪ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、及びカーボネート基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する繰り返し単位(以下、総称して「ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位」とも言う)を有していてもよい。
 ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位は、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基等の酸基を有さないのも好ましい。
<< Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group >>
The resin (A) is a repeating unit having at least one selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group". It may also have).
It is also preferable that the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group does not have an acid group such as a hexafluoropropanol group.
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基としては、ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造を有していればよい。ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造は、5~7員環ラクトン構造又は5~7員環スルトン構造が好ましい。なかでも、ビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環ラクトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているもの、又はビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環スルトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているもの、がより好ましい。
 樹脂(A)は、下記一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造、又は下記一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるラクトン基又はスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 また、ラクトン基又はスルトン基が主鎖に直接結合していてもよい。例えば、ラクトン基又はスルトン基の環員原子が、樹脂(A)の主鎖を構成してもよい。
The lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure. The lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure. Among them, a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure in which another ring structure is fused to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure, or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure. A structure in which another ring structure is fused is more preferable.
The resin (A) has a lactone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a table represented by any of the following general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). It is preferable to have a repeating unit having a lactone group or a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure.
Further, a lactone group or a sultone group may be directly bonded to the main chain. For example, a ring-membered atom of a lactone group or a sultone group may form the main chain of the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 上記ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造部分は、置換基(Rb)を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基(Rb)としては、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数4~7のシクロアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、シアノ基、及び酸分解性基等が挙げられる。n2は、0~4の整数を表す。n2が2以上の時、複数存在するRbは、異なっていてもよく、また、複数存在するRb同士が結合して環を形成してもよい。 The lactone structure or sultone structure portion may have a substituent (Rb 2 ). Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. , Halogen atom, hydroxyl group, cyano group, acid-degradable group and the like. n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, Rb 2 existing in plural numbers may be different or may be bonded to form a ring Rb 2 between the plurality of.
 一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造又は一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造を有する基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記一般式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位等が挙げられる。 It has a group having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) or a sultone structure represented by any of the general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). Examples of the repeating unit include a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (AI).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 一般式(AI)中、Rbは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 Rbのアルキル基が有していてもよい好ましい置換基としては、水酸基、及びハロゲン原子が挙げられる。
 Rbのハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。Rbは、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
 Abは、単結合、アルキレン基、単環又は多環の脂環炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボキシル基、又はこれらを組み合わせた2価の基を表す。なかでも、単結合、又は-Ab-CO-で表される連結基が好ましい。Abは、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキレン基、又は単環若しくは多環のシクロアルキレン基であり、メチレン基、エチレン基、シクロヘキシレン基、アダマンチレン基、又はノルボルニレン基が好ましい。
 Vは、一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基、又は一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基を表す。
In the general formula (AI), Rb 0 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
Preferred substituents that the alkyl group of Rb 0 may have include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom.
Examples of the halogen atom of Rb 0 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. Rb 0 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Ab is a divalent linking group having a single bond, an alkylene group, a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, or a divalent group combining these. Represent. Of these, a single bond or a linking group represented by -Ab 1- CO 2- is preferable. Ab 1 is a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, and a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, an adamantylene group, or a norbornene group is preferable.
V is a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-1). It represents a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of SL1-3).
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位に、光学異性体が存在する場合、いずれの光学異性体を用いてもよい。また、1種の光学異性体を単独で用いても、複数の光学異性体を混合して用いてもよい。1種の光学異性体を主に用いる場合、その光学純度(ee)は90以上が好ましく、95以上がより好ましい。 If an optical isomer is present in the repeating unit having a lactone group or a sultone group, any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more.
 カーボネート基としては、環状炭酸エステル基が好ましい。
 環状炭酸エステル基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記一般式(A-1)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。
As the carbonate group, a cyclic carbonate group is preferable.
As the repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate group, a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 一般式(A-1)中、R は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は1価の有機基(好ましくはメチル基)を表す。
 nは0以上の整数を表す。
 R は、置換基を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数存在するR は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Aは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。上記2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、単環又は多環の脂環炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボキシル基、又はこれらを組み合わせた2価の基が好ましい。
 Zは、式中の-O-CO-O-で表される基と共に単環又は多環を形成する原子団を表す。
In the general formula (A-1), RA 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic group (preferably a methyl group).
n represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
R A 2 represents a substituent. when n is 2 or more, R A 2 existing in plural, may each be the same or different.
A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, or a divalent combination thereof. Group is preferred.
Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring with a group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula.
 ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。 The repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group is illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対し、1モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、85モル%以下が好ましく、80モル%以下がより好ましく、70モル%以下が更に好ましく、60モル%以下が特に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, further preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less.
≪光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、上記以外の繰り返し単位として、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する基(以下「光酸発生基」ともいう)を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 この場合、この光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位が、後述する活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物(「光酸発生剤」ともいう。)にあたると考えることができる。
 このような繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記一般式(4)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
≪Repeating unit with photoacid generating group≫
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as “photoacid generating group”) as a repeating unit other than the above.
In this case, it can be considered that the repeating unit having this photoacid generating group corresponds to a compound (also referred to as “photoacid generator”) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation described later.
Examples of such a repeating unit include a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 R41は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。L41は、単結合、又は2価の連結基を表す。L42は、2価の連結基を表す。R40は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解して側鎖に酸を発生させる構造部位を表す。 R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. L 42 represents a divalent linking group. R 40 represents a structural site that is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to generate an acid in the side chain.
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。 The repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 そのほか、一般式(4)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-041327号公報の段落[0094]~[0105]に記載された繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 In addition, examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (4) include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP-A-2014-041327.
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、1モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、40モル%以下が好ましく、35モル%以下がより好ましく、30モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less.
≪一般式(V-1)又は下記一般式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、下記一般式(V-1)、又は下記一般式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 下記一般式(V-1)、及び下記一般式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位は上述の繰り返し単位とは異なる繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。
<< Repeat unit represented by the general formula (V-1) or the following general formula (V-2) >>
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (V-1) or the following general formula (V-2).
The repeating unit represented by the following general formula (V-1) and the following general formula (V-2) is preferably a repeating unit different from the above-mentioned repeating unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式中、
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR又は-COOR:Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐鎖状又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 nは、0~6の整数を表す。
 nは、0~4の整数を表す。
 Xは、メチレン基、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子である。
 一般式(V-1)又は(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。
During the ceremony
R 6 and R 7 independently have a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R is the number of carbon atoms. 1 to 6 alkyl groups or fluorinated alkyl groups), or carboxyl groups. As the alkyl group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
n 3 represents an integer from 0 to 6.
n 4 represents an integer from 0 to 4.
X 4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
The repeating unit represented by the general formula (V-1) or (V-2) is illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
≪主鎖の運動性を低下させるための繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、発生酸の過剰な拡散又は現像時のパターン崩壊を抑制できる観点から、ガラス転移温度(Tg)が高い方が好ましい。Tgは、90℃より大きいことが好ましく、100℃より大きいことがより好ましく、110℃より大きいことが更に好ましく、125℃より大きいことが特に好ましい。なお、過度な高Tg化は現像液への溶解速度低下を招くため、Tgは400℃以下が好ましく、350℃以下がより好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、樹脂(A)等のポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)は、以下の方法で算出する。まず、ポリマー中に含まれる各繰り返し単位のみからなるホモポリマーのTgを、Bicerano法によりそれぞれ算出する。以後、算出されたTgを、「繰り返し単位のTg」という。次に、ポリマー中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の質量割合(%)を算出する。次に、Foxの式(Materials Letters 62(2008)3152等に記載)を用いて各質量割合におけるTgを算出して、それらを総和して、ポリマーのTg(℃)とする。
 Bicerano法はPrediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York(1993)等に記載されている。またBicerano法によるTgの算出は、ポリマーの物性概算ソフトウェアMDL Polymer(MDL Information Systems, Inc.)を用いて行うことができる。
≪Repeating unit to reduce the motility of the main chain≫
The resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid or pattern disintegration during development. Tg is preferably greater than 90 ° C, more preferably greater than 100 ° C, even more preferably greater than 110 ° C, and particularly preferably greater than 125 ° C. In addition, since excessively high Tg causes a decrease in the dissolution rate in a developing solution, Tg is preferably 400 ° C. or lower, more preferably 350 ° C. or lower.
In the present specification, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer such as the resin (A) is calculated by the following method. First, the Tg of a homopolymer composed of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method. Hereinafter, the calculated Tg is referred to as "repeating unit Tg". Next, the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all the repeating units in the polymer is calculated. Next, Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using Fox's formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and the sum of them is used as the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
The Bicerano method is described in the Precision of developers, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993) and the like. Further, the calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using the polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
 樹脂(A)のTgを大きくする(好ましくは、Tgを90℃超とする)には、樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させることが好ましい。樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させる方法は、以下の(a)~(e)の方法が挙げられる。
(a)主鎖への嵩高い置換基の導入
(b)主鎖への複数の置換基の導入
(c)主鎖近傍への樹脂(A)間の相互作用を誘発する置換基の導入
(d)環状構造での主鎖形成
(e)主鎖への環状構造の連結
 なお、樹脂(A)は、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 なお、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位の種類は特に制限されず、Bicerano法により算出されるホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上である繰り返し単位であればよい。なお、後述する式(A)~式(E)で表される繰り返し単位中の官能基の種類によっては、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位に該当する。
In order to increase the Tg of the resin (A) (preferably, Tg exceeds 90 ° C.), it is preferable to reduce the motility of the main chain of the resin (A). Examples of the method for reducing the motility of the main chain of the resin (A) include the following methods (a) to (e).
(A) Introduction of a bulky substituent into the main chain (b) Introduction of a plurality of substituents into the main chain (c) Introduction of a substituent that induces an interaction between the resins (A) in the vicinity of the main chain ( d) Main chain formation in a cyclic structure (e) Connection of a cyclic structure to the main chain The resin (A) preferably has a repeating unit in which the Tg of the homopolymer is 130 ° C. or higher.
The type of repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher calculated by the Bicerano method may be used. Depending on the type of the functional group in the repeating unit represented by the formulas (A) to (E) described later, the homopolymer corresponds to the repeating unit having a Tg of 130 ° C. or higher.
(式(A)で表される繰り返し単位)
 上記(a)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit represented by the formula (A))
As an example of the specific means for achieving the above (a), there is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 式(A)、Rは、多環構造を有する基を表す。Rは、水素原子、メチル基、又はエチル基を表す。多環構造を有する基とは、複数の環構造を有する基であり、複数の環構造は縮合していても、縮合していなくてもよい。
 式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Formulas (A) and RA represent groups having a polycyclic structure. R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group. The group having a polycyclic structure is a group having a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 上記式中、Rは、水素原子、メチル基、又はエチル基を表す。
 Raは、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’’又は-COOR’’’:R’’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、Raで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 また、R’及びR’’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’’又は-COOR’’’:R’’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、R’及びR’’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、例えば、―COO-、-CO-、-O-、-S―、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びこれらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられる。
 m及びnは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。m及びnの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
Ra is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'''. Alternatively, -COOR "": R "" represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
In addition, R'and R'' are independently alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, alkenyl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, asyloxy groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, amino groups, halogen atoms, respectively. It represents an ester group (-OCOR ″ or −COOR ′ ″: R ″ is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'and R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a plurality of these. Examples thereof include linked linking groups.
m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are often 2 or less and more often 1 or less.
(式(B)で表される繰り返し単位)
 上記(b)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit represented by equation (B))
As an example of the specific means for achieving the above (b), there is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (B) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 式(B)中、Rb1~Rb4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rb1~Rb4のうち少なくとも2つ以上が有機基を表す。
 また、有機基の少なくとも1つが、繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基である場合、他の有機基の種類は特に制限されない。
 また、有機基のいずれも繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基ではない場合、有機基の少なくとも2つ以上は、水素原子を除く構成原子の数が3つ以上である置換基である。
In the formula (B), R b1 to R b4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
Further, when at least one of the organic groups is a group in which the ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
Further, when none of the organic groups is a group in which the ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, at least two or more organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (B) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、置換機を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基、等の有機基が挙げられる。
 R’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
R'is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'. 'Or-COOR'': R'represents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms) or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
(式(C)で表される繰り返し単位)
 上記(c)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit represented by formula (C))
As an example of the specific means for achieving the above (c), there is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (C) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 式(C)中、Rc1~Rc4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rc1~Rc4のうち少なくとも1つが、主鎖炭素から原子数3以内に水素結合性の水素原子を有する基である。なかでも、樹脂(A)の主鎖間の相互作用を誘発するうえで、原子数2以内(より主鎖近傍側)に水素結合性の水素原子を有することが好ましい。 In the formula (C), R c1 to R c4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 is a hydrogen-bonding hydrogen within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon. It is a group having an atom. Among them, in order to induce the interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen-bonding hydrogen atoms within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
 式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 上記式中、Rは有機基を表す。有機基としては、置換機を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、及びエステル基(-OCOR又は-COOR:Rは炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)等が挙げられる。
 R’は、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基、等の有機基が挙げられる。なお、有機基中の水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
In the above formula, R represents an organic group. The organic group may have a substituent, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Alternatively, an alkyl fluorinated group) and the like can be mentioned.
R'represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group. The hydrogen atom in the organic group may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
(式(D)で表される繰り返し単位)
 上記(d)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(D)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit represented by formula (D))
As an example of the specific means for achieving the above (d), there is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (D) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 式(D)中、「cylic」は、環状構造で主鎖を形成している基を表す。環の構成原子数は特に制限されない。 In formula (D), "cylic" represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure. The number of constituent atoms of the ring is not particularly limited.
 式(D)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (D) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、Rで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 上記式中、R’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, respectively. An ester group (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
In the above formula, R'is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom and an ester group. (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
(式(E)で表される繰り返し単位)
 上記(e)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(E)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit represented by formula (E))
As an example of the specific means for achieving the above (e), there is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 式(E)中、Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、置換機を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基等が挙げられる。
 「cylic」は、主鎖の炭素原子を含む環状基である。環状基に含まれる原子数は特に制限されない。
In formula (E), Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like, which may have a substituent.
"Cylic" is a cyclic group containing a carbon atom in the main chain. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
 式(E)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (E) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、Rで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 R’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換機を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
 また、式(E-2)、式(E-4)、式(E-6)、及び式(E-8)中、2つRは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
In the above formula, R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, and a halogen atom. , Esther group (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
R'is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group. (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
Further, in the formula (E-2), the formula (E-4), the formula (E-6), and the formula (E-8), the two Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 式(E)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、5モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、60モル%以下が好ましく55モル%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (E) is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 55 mol% or less.
≪ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 樹脂(A)が有するラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位としては、上述した≪ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位≫で説明した繰り返し単位が挙げられる。好ましい含有量も上述した≪ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位≫で説明した通りである。
<< Repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group >>
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group contained in the resin (A) include the repeating unit described in the above-mentioned << Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group >>. The preferable content is also as described in << Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group >> described above.
 樹脂(A)は、水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。これにより基板密着性、現像液親和性が向上する。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位は、水酸基又はシアノ基で置換された脂環炭化水素構造を有する繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有さないことが好ましい。水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記一般式(AIIa)~(AIId)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. This improves substrate adhesion and developer affinity.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group preferably does not have an acid-degradable group. Examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include repeating units represented by the following general formulas (AIIA) to (AIId).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 一般式(AIIa)~(AIId)において、
 R1cは、水素原子、メチル基、トリフロロメチル基又はヒドロキメチル基を表す。
 R2c~R4cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基又はシアノ基を表す。ただし、R2c~R4cのうちの少なくとも1つは、水酸基又はシアノ基を表す。好ましくは、R2c~R4cの内の1つ又は2つが水酸基で、残りが水素原子である。より好ましくは、R2c~R4cの内の2つが水酸基で、残りが水素原子である。
In the general formulas (AIIA) to (AIId),
R 1c represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group or a hydrochimethyl group.
R 2c to R 4c independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. However, at least one of R 2c to R 4c represents a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. Preferably, one or two of R 2c to R 4c are hydroxyl groups and the rest are hydrogen atoms. More preferably, two of R 2c to R 4c are hydroxyl groups, and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、5モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、40モル%以下が好ましく、35モル%以下がより好ましく、30モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less.
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に挙げるが、本発明はこれらに限定されない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group are given below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 樹脂(A)は、アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、ビスルスルホニルイミド基、α位が電子吸引性基で置換された脂肪族アルコール(例えば、ヘキサフロロイソプロパノール基)が挙げられ、カルボキシル基が好ましい。樹脂(A)がアルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、コンタクトホール用途での解像性が増す。
 アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、アクリル酸及びメタクリル酸による繰り返し単位のような樹脂の主鎖に直接アルカリ可溶性基が結合している繰り返し単位、又は連結基を介して樹脂の主鎖にアルカリ可溶性基が結合している繰り返し単位が挙げられる。なお、連結基は、単環又は多環の環状炭化水素構造を有していてもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、アクリル酸又はメタクリル酸による繰り返し単位が好ましい。
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the alkali-soluble group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bisulsulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol in which the α-position is substituted with an electron-withdrawing group (for example, a hexafluoroisopropanol group). Is preferable. When the resin (A) contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, the resolution in contact hole applications is increased.
The repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group includes a repeating unit in which an alkali-soluble group is directly bonded to the main chain of the resin, such as a repeating unit made of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, or an alkali on the main chain of the resin via a linking group. Repeat units to which soluble groups are attached can be mentioned. The linking group may have a monocyclic or polycyclic cyclic hydrocarbon structure.
As the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, a repeating unit made of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid is preferable.
 アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、0モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましく、5モル%以上が更に好ましい。その上限値としては、20モル%以下が好ましく、15モル%以下がより好ましく、10モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more, still more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). The upper limit is preferably 20 mol% or less, more preferably 15 mol% or less, still more preferably 10 mol% or less.
 アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明は、これに限定されるものではない。具体例中、RxはH、CH、CHOH又はCFを表す。 Specific examples of repeating units having an alkali-soluble group are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the specific example, Rx represents H, CH 3 , CH 2 OH or CF 3 .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 ラクトン基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位として、ラクトン基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも2つを有する繰り返し単位が好ましく、シアノ基とラクトン基を有する繰り返し単位がより好ましく、一般式(LC1-4)で表されるラクトン構造にシアノ基が置換した構造を有する繰り返し単位が更に好ましい。 As the repeating unit having at least one kind selected from a lactone group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group, a repeating unit having at least two selected from a lactone group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group is preferable. , A repeating unit having a cyano group and a lactone group is more preferable, and a repeating unit having a structure in which a cyano group is substituted with a lactone structure represented by the general formula (LC1-4) is further preferable.
≪脂環炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、脂環炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位を有してもよい。これにより液浸露光時にレジスト膜から液浸液への低分子成分の溶出が低減できる。このような繰り返し単位として、例えば、1-アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジアマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカニル(メタ)アクリレート、又はシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位等が挙げられる。
≪Repeating unit with alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and not showing acid degradability≫
The resin (A) may have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and may have a repeating unit that does not exhibit acid degradability. As a result, the elution of low molecular weight components from the resist film to the immersion liquid during immersion exposure can be reduced. Examples of such a repeating unit include a repeating unit derived from 1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, diamantyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
≪水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、一般式(III)で表される繰り返し単位≫
 樹脂(A)は、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、一般式(III)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
<< Repeat unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group >>
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 一般式(III)中、Rは少なくとも一つの環状構造を有し、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない炭化水素基を表す。
 Raは水素原子、アルキル基又は-CH-O-Ra基を表す。式中、Raは、水素原子、アルキル基又はアシル基を表す。
In the general formula (III), R 5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or -CH 2 -O-Ra 2 group. In the formula, Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group.
 Rが有する環状構造には、単環式炭化水素基及び多環式炭化水素基が含まれる。単環式炭化水素基としては、例えば、炭素数3~12(より好ましくは炭素数3~7)のシクロアルキル基、又は炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基が挙げられる。 The cyclic structure of R 5 includes a monocyclic hydrocarbon group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon group include a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
 多環式炭化水素基としては、環集合炭化水素基及び架橋環式炭化水素基が挙げられる。架橋環式炭化水素環としては、2環式炭化水素環、3環式炭化水素環、及び4環式炭化水素環等が挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環としては、5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環も含まれる。
 架橋環式炭化水素基として、ノルボルニル基、アダマンチル基、ビシクロオクタニル基、又はトリシクロ[5、2、1、02,6]デカニル基が好ましく、ノルボニル基又はアダマンチル基がより好ましい。
Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon group include a ring-aggregated hydrocarbon group and a crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring. The crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring also includes a fused ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
As the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon group, a norbornyl group, an adamantyl group, a bicyclooctanyl group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2,6 ] decanyl group is preferable, and a norbonyl group or an adamantyl group is more preferable.
 脂環式炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アルキル基、保護基で保護されたヒドロキシル基、及び保護基で保護されたアミノ基が挙げられる。
 ハロゲン原子としては、臭素原子、塩素原子、又はフッ素原子が好ましい。
 アルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、ブチル基、又はt-ブチル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基は更に置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、保護基で保護されたヒドロキシル基、又は保護基で保護されたアミノ基が挙げられる。
The alicyclic hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group protected by a protective group, and an amino group protected by a protective group.
As the halogen atom, a bromine atom, a chlorine atom, or a fluorine atom is preferable.
As the alkyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, or a t-butyl group is preferable. The alkyl group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group protected by a protective group, and an amino group protected by a protective group.
 保護基としては、例えば、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アラルキル基、置換メチル基、置換エチル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、及びアラルキルオキシカルボニル基が挙げられる。
 アルキル基としては、炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 置換メチル基としては、メトキシメチル基、メトキシチオメチル基、ベンジルオキシメチル基、t-ブトキシメチル基、又は2-メトキシエトキシメチル基が好ましい。
 置換エチル基としては、1-エトキシエチル基、又は1-メチル-1-メトキシエチル基が好ましい。
 アシル基としては、ホルミル基、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブチリル基、イソブチリル基、バレリル基、及びピバロイル基等の炭素数1~6の脂肪族アシル基が好ましい。
 アルコキシカルボニル基としては、炭素数1~4のアルコキシカルボニル基が好ましい。
Examples of the protecting group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, a substituted methyl group, a substituted ethyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, and an aralkyloxycarbonyl group.
As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
As the substituted methyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methoxythiomethyl group, a benzyloxymethyl group, a t-butoxymethyl group, or a 2-methoxyethoxymethyl group is preferable.
As the substituted ethyl group, a 1-ethoxyethyl group or a 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl group is preferable.
As the acyl group, an aliphatic acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as a formyl group, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a valeryl group, and a pivaloyl group is preferable.
As the alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
 水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、一般式(III)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対し、0~40モル%が好ましく、0~20モル%がより好ましい。
 一般式(III)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に挙げるが、本発明はこれらに限定されない。式中、Raは、H、CH、CHOH、又はCFを表す。
The content of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (III), which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group, is preferably 0 to 40 mol%, preferably 0 to 20 mol%, based on all the repeating units in the resin (A). More preferably mol%.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (III) are given below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the formula, Ra represents H, CH 3 , CH 2 OH, or CF 3 .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
≪その他の繰り返し単位≫
 更に、樹脂(A)は、上述した繰り返し単位以外の繰り返し単位を有してもよい。
 例えば樹脂(A)は、オキサチアン環基を有する繰り返し単位、オキサゾロン環基を有する繰り返し単位、ジオキサン環基を有する繰り返し単位、及びヒダントイン環基を有する繰り返し単位からなる群から選択される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 このような繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。
≪Other repeating units≫
Further, the resin (A) may have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit described above.
For example, the resin (A) has a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxatian ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantin ring group. You may be doing it.
Such repeating units are illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 樹脂(A)は、上記の繰り返し構造単位以外に、ドライエッチング耐性、標準現像液適性、基板密着性、レジストプロファイル、解像力、耐熱性、及び感度等を調節する目的で様々な繰り返し構造単位を有していてもよい。 In addition to the above-mentioned repeating structural units, the resin (A) has various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, standard developer suitability, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, and the like. You may be doing it.
 樹脂(A)としては、(特に、特定レジスト組成物がArF用のレジスト組成物として用いられる場合)繰り返し単位のすべてが(メタ)アクリレート系繰り返し単位で構成されるのも好ましい。この場合、繰り返し単位のすべてがメタクリレート系繰り返し単位であるもの、繰り返し単位のすべてがアクリレート系繰り返し単位であるもの、繰り返し単位のすべてがメタクリレート系繰り返し単位とアクリレート系繰り返し単位とによるもののいずれのものでも用いることができ、アクリレート系繰り返し単位が全繰り返し単位の50モル%以下であることが好ましい。 As the resin (A), it is also preferable that all the repeating units (particularly when the specific resist composition is used as the resist composition for ArF) are composed of (meth) acrylate-based repeating units. In this case, all the repeating units are methacrylate-based repeating units, all the repeating units are acrylate-based repeating units, and all the repeating units are either methacrylate-based repeating units or acrylate-based repeating units. It can be used, and the acrylate-based repeating unit is preferably 50 mol% or less of all the repeating units.
 樹脂(A)は、常法に従って(例えばラジカル重合)合成できる。
 GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量は、3,000~20,000が好ましく、5,000~15,000がより好ましい。樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量を、3,000~200,000とすることにより、耐熱性及びドライエッチング耐性の劣化をより一層抑制できる。また、現像性の劣化、及び粘度が高くなって製膜性が劣化することもより一層抑制できる。
 樹脂(A)の分散度(分子量分布)は、通常1~5であり、1~3が好ましく、1.2~3.0がより好ましく、1.2~2.0が更に好ましい。分散度が小さいものほど、解像度、及びレジスト形状がより優れ、更に、レジストパターンの側壁がよりスムーズであり、ラフネス性にもより優れる。
The resin (A) can be synthesized according to a conventional method (for example, radical polymerization).
The weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) is preferably 3,000 to 20,000, more preferably 5,000 to 15,000 as a polystyrene-equivalent value according to the GPC method. By setting the weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) to 3,000 to 200,000, deterioration of heat resistance and dry etching resistance can be further suppressed. Further, deterioration of developability and deterioration of film forming property due to high viscosity can be further suppressed.
The dispersity (molecular weight distribution) of the resin (A) is usually 1 to 5, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1.2 to 3.0, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.0. The smaller the degree of dispersion, the better the resolution and the resist shape, the smoother the side wall of the resist pattern, and the better the roughness.
 特定レジスト組成物において、樹脂(A)の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、50~99.9質量%が好ましく、60~99.0質量%がより好ましい。
 なお、固形分とは、組成物中の溶剤を除いた成分を意図し、溶剤以外の成分であれば液状成分であっても固形分とみなす。
 また、樹脂(A)は、1種で使用してもよいし、複数併用してもよい。
In the specific resist composition, the content of the resin (A) is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
The solid content is intended to be a component in the composition excluding the solvent, and any component other than the solvent is regarded as a solid content even if it is a liquid component.
Further, the resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
<酸拡散制御剤>
 特定レジスト組成物は、更に、酸拡散制御剤を含んでいてもよい。
 酸拡散制御剤は、露光時に光酸発生剤等から発生する酸をトラップし、余分な発生酸による、未露光部における酸分解性樹脂の反応を抑制するクエンチャーとして作用するものである。酸拡散制御剤としては、例えば、塩基性化合物(DA)、活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩基性が低下又は消失する塩基性化合物(DB)、窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物(DD)、及びカチオン部に窒素原子を有するオニウム塩化合物(DE)等を酸拡散制御剤として使用できる。特定レジスト組成物においては、公知の酸拡散制御剤を適宜使用できる。例えば、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号明細書の段落[0627]~[0664]、米国特許出願公開2015/0004544A1号明細書の段落[0095]~[0187]、米国特許出願公開2016/0237190A1号明細書の段落[0403]~[0423]、及び米国特許出願公開2016/0274458A1号明細書の段落[0259]~[0328]に開示された公知の化合物を酸拡散制御剤として好適に使用できる。
<Acid diffusion control agent>
The specific resist composition may further contain an acid diffusion control agent.
The acid diffusion control agent acts as a quencher that traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator or the like at the time of exposure and suppresses the reaction of the acid-degradable resin in the unexposed portion due to the excess generated acid. The acid diffusion control agent includes, for example, a basic compound (DA), a basic compound (DB) whose basicity is reduced or eliminated by irradiation with active light or radiation, and a nitrogen atom, which is eliminated by the action of an acid. A low molecular weight compound (DD) having a group, an onium salt compound (DE) having a nitrogen atom in the cation portion, and the like can be used as an acid diffusion control agent. In the specific resist composition, a known acid diffusion control agent can be appropriately used. For example, paragraphs [0627] to [0664] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1, paragraphs [0995] to [0187] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0004544A1, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0237190A1. Known compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0403] to [0423] of the specification and paragraphs [0259] to [0328] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0274458A1 can be suitably used as the acid diffusion control agent.
(塩基性化合物(DA))
 塩基性化合物(DA)としては、下記式(A)~(E)で示される構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
(Basic compound (DA))
As the basic compound (DA), compounds having a structure represented by the following formulas (A) to (E) are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 一般式(A)及び(E)中、
 R200、R201及びR202は、同一でも異なってもよく、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~20)又はアリール基(炭素数6~20)を表す。R201とR202は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 R203、R204、R205及びR206は、同一でも異なってもよく、各々独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。
In the general formulas (A) and (E),
R 200 , R 201 and R 202 may be the same or different, and each independently has a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl. Represents a group (6 to 20 carbon atoms). R 201 and R 202 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
R 203 , R 204 , R 205 and R 206 may be the same or different, and each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
 一般式(A)及び(E)中のアルキル基は、置換基を有していても無置換であってもよい。
 上記アルキル基について、置換基を有するアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアミノアルキル基、炭素数1~20のヒドロキシアルキル基、又は炭素数1~20のシアノアルキル基が好ましい。
 一般式(A)及び(E)中のアルキル基は、無置換であることがより好ましい。
The alkyl groups in the general formulas (A) and (E) may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
Regarding the above alkyl group, as the alkyl group having a substituent, an aminoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyanoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable.
It is more preferable that the alkyl groups in the general formulas (A) and (E) are unsubstituted.
 塩基性化合物(DA)としては、グアニジン、アミノピロリジン、ピラゾール、ピラゾリン、ピペラジン、アミノモルホリン、アミノアルキルモルフォリン、又はピペリジンが好ましく、イミダゾール構造、ジアザビシクロ構造、オニウムヒドロキシド構造、オニウムカルボキシレート構造、トリアルキルアミン構造、アニリン構造若しくはピリジン構造を有する化合物、水酸基及び/若しくはエーテル結合を有するアルキルアミン誘導体、又は水酸基及び/若しくはエーテル結合を有するアニリン誘導体がより好ましい。 As the basic compound (DA), guanidine, aminopyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, aminomorpholin, aminoalkylmorpholin, or piperidine are preferable, and imidazole structure, diazabicyclo structure, onium hydroxide structure, onium carboxylate structure, and tri. A compound having an alkylamine structure, an aniline structure or a pyridine structure, an alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond, or an aniline derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond is more preferable.
(活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩基性が低下又は消失する塩基性化合物(DB))
 活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩基性が低下又は消失する塩基性化合物(DB)(以下、「化合物(DB)」ともいう)は、プロトンアクセプター性官能基を有し、かつ、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解して、プロトンアクセプター性が低下、消失、又はプロトンアクセプター性から酸性に変化する化合物である。
(Basic compound (DB) whose basicity is reduced or eliminated by irradiation with active light or radiation)
A basic compound (DB) whose basicity is reduced or eliminated by irradiation with active light or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as “compound (DB)”) has a proton acceptor functional group and is active light or radiation. It is a compound whose proton acceptor property is reduced or eliminated, or changes from proton acceptor property to acidity by being decomposed by irradiation with.
 プロトンアクセプター性官能基とは、プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基又は電子を有する官能基であって、例えば、環状ポリエーテル等のマクロサイクリック構造を有する官能基、又はπ共役に寄与しない非共有電子対をもった窒素原子を有する官能基を意味する。π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対を有する窒素原子とは、例えば、下記式に示す部分構造を有する窒素原子である。 A proton-accepting functional group is a functional group having a group or an electron capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton, for example, a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a π-conjugated group. It means a functional group having a nitrogen atom with an unshared electron pair that does not contribute. The nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to π conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 プロトンアクセプター性官能基の好ましい部分構造として、例えば、クラウンエーテル構造、アザクラウンエーテル構造、1~3級アミン構造、ピリジン構造、イミダゾール構造、及びピラジン構造が挙げられる。 Preferred partial structures of the proton acceptor functional group include, for example, a crown ether structure, an aza crown ether structure, a primary to tertiary amine structure, a pyridine structure, an imidazole structure, and a pyrazine structure.
 化合物(DB)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解してプロトンアクセプター性が低下若しくは消失し、又はプロトンアクセプター性から酸性に変化した化合物を発生する。ここでプロトンアクセプター性の低下若しくは消失、又はプロトンアクセプター性から酸性への変化とは、プロトンアクセプター性官能基にプロトンが付加することに起因するプロトンアクセプター性の変化であり、具体的には、プロトンアクセプター性官能基を有する化合物(DB)とプロトンとからプロトン付加体が生成するとき、その化学平衡における平衡定数が減少することを意味する。
 プロトンアクセプター性は、pH測定を行うことによって確認できる。
The compound (DB) is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to reduce or eliminate the proton acceptor property, or generate a compound in which the proton acceptor property is changed to acidic. Here, the decrease or disappearance of the proton acceptor property, or the change from the proton acceptor property to the acidity is a change in the proton acceptor property due to the addition of a proton to the proton acceptor property functional group, and is specific. Means that when a proton adduct is formed from a compound (DB) having a proton-accepting functional group and a proton, the equilibrium constant in its chemical equilibrium decreases.
Proton acceptability can be confirmed by measuring pH.
 活性光線又は放射線の照射により化合物(DB)が分解して発生する化合物の酸解離定数(pKa)は、pKa<-1を満たすことが好ましく、-13<pKa<-1を満たすことがより好ましく、-13<pKa<-3を満たすことが更に好ましい。 The acid dissociation constant (pKa) of the compound generated by decomposing the compound (DB) by irradiation with active light or radiation preferably satisfies pKa <-1, and more preferably -13 <pKa <-1. , -13 <pKa <-3 is more preferable.
 なお、酸解離定数(pKa)とは、上述した方法により求めることができる。 The acid dissociation constant (pKa) can be obtained by the method described above.
(窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物(DD))
 窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物(DD)(以下、「化合物(DD)」ともいう)は、酸の作用により脱離する基を窒素原子上に有するアミン誘導体であることが好ましい。
 酸の作用により脱離する基としては、アセタール基、カルボネート基、カルバメート基、3級エステル基、3級水酸基、又はヘミアミナールエーテル基が好ましく、カルバメート基、又はヘミアミナールエーテル基がより好ましい。
 化合物(DD)の分子量は、100~1000が好ましく、100~700がより好ましく、100~500が更に好ましい。
 化合物(DD)は、窒素原子上に保護基を有するカルバメート基を有してもよい。カルバメート基を構成する保護基としては、下記一般式(d-1)で表される。
(Low molecular weight compound (DD) having a nitrogen atom and having a group eliminated by the action of an acid)
A low molecular weight compound (DD) having a nitrogen atom and having a group desorbed by the action of an acid (hereinafter, also referred to as “compound (DD)”) has a group desorbed by the action of an acid on the nitrogen atom. It is preferably an amine derivative.
As the group desorbed by the action of the acid, an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group, or a hemiaminol ether group is preferable, and a carbamate group or a hemiaminol ether group is more preferable. ..
The molecular weight of the compound (DD) is preferably 100 to 1000, more preferably 100 to 700, and even more preferably 100 to 500.
Compound (DD) may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on the nitrogen atom. The protecting group constituting the carbamate group is represented by the following general formula (d-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 一般式(d-1)において、
 Rは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~30)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数3~30)、アラルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10)、又はアルコキシアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10)を表す。Rは相互に連結して環を形成していてもよい。
 Rが示すアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基は、各々独立に、水酸基、シアノ基、アミノ基、ピロリジノ基、ピペリジノ基、モルホリノ基、オキソ基等の官能基、アルコキシ基、又はハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。Rが示すアルコキシアルキル基についても同様である。
In the general formula (d-1)
R b is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms), and an alkoxy group. It represents (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms) or an alkoxyalkyl group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms). R b may be connected to each other to form a ring.
The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group represented by Rb are independently functional groups such as hydroxyl groups, cyano groups, amino groups, pyrrolidino groups, piperidino groups, morpholino groups, and oxo groups, and alkoxy groups. Alternatively, it may be substituted with a halogen atom. The same applies to the alkoxyalkyl group indicated by R b .
 Rとしては、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はアリール基が好ましく、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又はシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。
 2つのRが相互に連結して形成する環としては、脂環式炭化水素、芳香族炭化水素、複素環式炭化水素、及びその誘導体等が挙げられる。
 一般式(d-1)で表される基の具体的な構造としては、米国特許公報US2012/0135348A1号明細書の段落[0466]に開示された構造が挙げられるが、これに制限されない。
As R b , a linear or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group is more preferable.
Examples of the ring formed by connecting the two R bs to each other include an alicyclic hydrocarbon, an aromatic hydrocarbon, a heterocyclic hydrocarbon, and a derivative thereof.
Specific structures of the group represented by the general formula (d-1) include, but are not limited to, the structure disclosed in paragraph [0466] of US Patent Publication US2012 / 0135348A1.
 化合物(DD)は、下記一般式(6)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The compound (DD) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (6).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
 一般式(6)において、
 lは0~2の整数を表し、mは1~3の整数を表し、l+m=3を満たす。
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基又はアラルキル基を表す。lが2のとき、2つのRは同じでも異なっていてもよく、2つのRは相互に連結して式中の窒素原子と共に複素環を形成していてもよい。この複素環には式中の窒素原子以外のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい。
 Rは、上記一般式(d-1)におけるRと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。
 一般式(6)において、Rとしてのアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基は、各々独立に、Rとしてのアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基が置換されていてもよい基として前述した基と同様な基で置換されていてもよい。
In the general formula (6)
l represents an integer of 0 to 2, m represents an integer of 1 to 3, and satisfies l + m = 3.
Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group. When l is 2, the two Ras may be the same or different, and the two Ras may be interconnected to form a heterocycle with the nitrogen atom in the equation. This heterocycle may contain a heteroatom other than the nitrogen atom in the formula.
R b has the same meaning as R b in formula (d-1), and preferred examples are also the same.
In the general formula (6), the alkyl group as R a, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group and aralkyl group, each independently, alkyl group as R b, cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups, is replaced The group may be substituted with a group similar to the group described above.
 上記Rのアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基(これらの基は、上記基で置換されていてもよい)の具体例としては、Rについて前述した具体例と同様な基が挙げられる。
 本発明における特に好ましい化合物(DD)の具体例としては、米国特許出願公開2012/0135348A1号明細書の段落[0475]に開示された化合物が挙げられるが、これに制限されない。
Specific examples of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group of Ra (these groups may be substituted with the above groups) are the same groups as those described above for R b. Can be mentioned.
Specific examples of a particularly preferred compound (DD) in the present invention include, but are not limited to, the compounds disclosed in paragraph [0475] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/01335348A1.
(カチオン部に窒素原子を有するオニウム塩化合物(DE))
 カチオン部に窒素原子を有するオニウム塩化合物(DE)(以下、「化合物(DE)」ともいう)は、カチオン部に窒素原子を含む塩基性部位を有する化合物であることが好ましい。塩基性部位は、アミノ基であることが好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基であることがより好ましい。塩基性部位中の窒素原子に隣接する原子の全てが、水素原子又は炭素原子であることが更に好ましい。また、塩基性向上の観点から、窒素原子に対して、電子求引性の官能基(カルボニル基、スルホニル基、シアノ基、及びハロゲン原子等)が直結していないことが好ましい。
 化合物(DE)の好ましい具体例としては、米国特許出願公開2015/0309408A1号明細書の段落[0203]に開示された化合物が挙げられるが、これに制限されない。
(Onium salt compound (DE) having a nitrogen atom in the cation part)
The onium salt compound (DE) having a nitrogen atom in the cation portion (hereinafter, also referred to as “compound (DE)”) is preferably a compound having a basic moiety containing a nitrogen atom in the cation portion. The basic moiety is preferably an amino group, more preferably an aliphatic amino group. It is more preferable that all the atoms adjacent to the nitrogen atom in the basic moiety are hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms. Further, from the viewpoint of improving basicity, it is preferable that an electron-attracting functional group (carbonyl group, sulfonyl group, cyano group, halogen atom, etc.) is not directly bonded to the nitrogen atom.
Preferred specific examples of compound (DE) include, but are not limited to, the compound disclosed in paragraph [0203] of US Patent Application Publication 2015/0309408A1.
 酸拡散制御剤の好ましい例を以下に示す。 A preferable example of the acid diffusion control agent is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
 特定レジスト組成物に酸拡散制御剤が含まれる場合、酸拡散制御剤の含有量(複数種存在する場合はその合計)は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~11.0質量%が好ましく、0.1~10.0質量%がより好ましく、0.1~8.0質量%が更に好ましく、0.1~5.0質量%が特に好ましい。
 特定レジスト組成物において、酸拡散制御剤は1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
When the specific resist composition contains an acid diffusion control agent, the content of the acid diffusion control agent (the total of multiple types, if present) is 0.1 to 11.0 with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The mass% is preferable, 0.1 to 10.0 mass% is more preferable, 0.1 to 8.0 mass% is further preferable, and 0.1 to 5.0 mass% is particularly preferable.
In the specific resist composition, one type of acid diffusion control agent may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
<疎水性樹脂>
 特定レジスト組成物は、上記樹脂(A)とは別に樹脂(A)とは異なる疎水性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂はレジスト膜の表面に偏在するように設計されることが好ましいが、界面活性剤とは異なり、必ずしも分子内に親水基を有する必要はなく、極性物質及び非極性物質を均一に混合することに寄与しなくてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂を添加することの効果として、水に対するレジスト膜表面の静的及び動的な接触角の制御、並びにアウトガスの抑制等が挙げられる。
<Hydrophobic resin>
The specific resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A) in addition to the resin (A).
Hydrophobic resins are preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike surfactants, they do not necessarily have to have hydrophilic groups in the molecule, and polar and non-polar substances are uniformly mixed. It does not have to contribute to doing so.
The effects of adding the hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angles of the resist film surface with respect to water, and suppressing outgas.
 疎水性樹脂は、膜表層への偏在化の観点から、“フッ素原子”、“珪素原子”、及び“樹脂の側鎖部分に含まれたCH部分構造”のいずれか1種以上を有することが好ましく、2種以上を有することがより好ましい。また、上記疎水性樹脂は、炭素数5以上の炭化水素基を有することが好ましい。これらの基は樹脂の主鎖中に有していても、側鎖に置換していてもよい。 Hydrophobic resin from the viewpoint of uneven distribution in the film surface layer, "fluorine atom", "silicon atom", and to have any one or more "CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin" Is preferable, and it is more preferable to have two or more kinds. Further, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain.
 疎水性樹脂が、フッ素原子及び/又は珪素原子を含む場合、疎水性樹脂における上記フッ素原子及び/又は珪素原子は、樹脂の主鎖中に含まれていてもよく、側鎖中に含まれていてもよい。 When the hydrophobic resin contains fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms, the fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms in the hydrophobic resin may be contained in the main chain of the resin and may be contained in the side chains. You may.
 疎水性樹脂がフッ素原子を含んでいる場合、フッ素原子を有する部分構造としては、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基、フッ素原子を有するシクロアルキル基、又はフッ素原子を有するアリール基が好ましい。
 フッ素原子を有するアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10、より好ましくは炭素数1~4)は、少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換された直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基であり、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子を有するシクロアルキル基は、少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換された単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基であり、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子を有するアリール基としては、フェニル基、及びナフチル基等のアリール基の少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換されたものが挙げられ、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子又は珪素原子を有する繰り返し単位の例としては、US2012/0251948A1の段落[0519]に例示されたものが挙げられる。
When the hydrophobic resin contains a fluorine atom, the partial structure having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, a cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom, or an aryl group having a fluorine atom.
The alkyl group having a fluorine atom (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) is a linear or branched alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom. Further, it may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom.
The cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom is a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom, and may further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
Examples of the aryl group having a fluorine atom include those in which at least one hydrogen atom of an aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, and even if the aryl group has a substituent other than the fluorine atom. Good.
Examples of repeating units having a fluorine atom or a silicon atom include those exemplified in paragraph [0519] of US2012 / 0251948A1.
 また、上記したように、疎水性樹脂は、側鎖部分にCH部分構造を含むことも好ましい。
 ここで、疎水性樹脂中の側鎖部分が有するCH部分構造は、エチル基、及びプロピル基等が有するCH部分構造を含むものである。
 一方、疎水性樹脂の主鎖に直接結合しているメチル基(例えば、メタクリル酸構造を有する繰り返し単位のα-メチル基)は、主鎖の影響により疎水性樹脂の表面偏在化への寄与が小さいため、本発明におけるCH部分構造に含まれないものとする。
Further, as described above, the hydrophobic resin may also preferably comprise a CH 3 partial structure side chain moiety.
Here, CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion in the hydrophobic resin are those containing CH 3 partial structure ethyl, and propyl groups and the like have.
On the other hand, the methyl group directly bonded to the main chain of the hydrophobic resin (for example, the α-methyl group of the repeating unit having a methacrylic acid structure) contributes to the uneven distribution of the surface of the hydrophobic resin due to the influence of the main chain. small order shall not be included in the CH 3 partial structures in the present invention.
 疎水性樹脂に関しては、特開2014-010245号公報の段落[0348]~[0415]の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Regarding the hydrophobic resin, the description in paragraphs [0348] to [0415] of JP2014-010245A can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
 なお、疎水性樹脂としてはこの他にも特開2011-248019号公報、特開2010-175859号公報、特開2012-032544号公報記載の樹脂も好ましく用いることができる。 As the hydrophobic resin, the resins described in JP-A-2011-24801, JP-A-2010-175859, and JP-A-2012-032544 can also be preferably used.
 疎水性樹脂を構成する繰り返し単位に相当するモノマーの好ましい例を以下に示す。 A preferable example of the monomer corresponding to the repeating unit constituting the hydrophobic resin is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
 特定レジスト組成物が疎水性樹脂を含む場合、疎水性樹脂の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20.0質量%が好ましく、0.1~15.0質量%がより好ましく、0.1~10.0質量%が更に好ましく、0.1~6.0質量%が特に好ましい。 When the specific resist composition contains a hydrophobic resin, the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably 0.01 to 20.0% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 15.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. % Is more preferable, 0.1 to 10.0% by mass is further preferable, and 0.1 to 6.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
<界面活性剤>
 特定レジスト組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。界面活性剤を含むことにより、密着性により優れ、現像欠陥のより少ないパターンを形成できる。
 界面活性剤としては、フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、米国特許出願公開第2008/0248425号明細書の段落[0276]に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられる。また、エフトップEF301又はEF303(新秋田化成(株)製);フロラードFC430、431又は4430(住友スリーエム(株)製);メガファックF171、F173、F176、F189、F113、F110、F177、F120又はR08(DIC(株)製);サーフロンS-382、SC101、102、103、104、105又は106(旭硝子(株)製);トロイゾルS-366(トロイケミカル(株)製);GF-300又はGF-150(東亞合成化学(株)製)、サーフロンS-393(セイミケミカル(株)製);エフトップEF121、EF122A、EF122B、RF122C、EF125M、EF135M、EF351、EF352、EF801、EF802又はEF601((株)ジェムコ製);PF636、PF656、PF6320又はPF6520(OMNOVA社製);KH-20(旭化成(株)製);FTX-204G、208G、218G、230G、204D、208D、212D、218D又は222D((株)ネオス製)を用いてもよい。なお、ポリシロキサンポリマーKP-341(信越化学工業(株)製)も、シリコン系界面活性剤として用いることができる。
<Surfactant>
The specific resist composition may contain a surfactant. By containing a surfactant, it is possible to form a pattern having better adhesion and fewer development defects.
As the surfactant, a fluorine-based surfactant and / or a silicon-based surfactant is preferable.
Fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants include, for example, the surfactants described in paragraph [0276] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425. In addition, Ftop EF301 or EF303 (manufactured by Shin-Akita Kasei Co., Ltd.); Florard FC430, 431 or 4430 (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.); Megafuck F171, F173, F176, F189, F113, F110, F177, F120 or R08 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.); Surflon S-382, SC101, 102, 103, 104, 105 or 106 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.); Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.); GF-300 or GF-150 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-393 (manufactured by Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.); EFTOP EF121, EF122A, EF122B, RF122C, EF125M, EF135M, EF351, EF352, EF801, EF802 or EF601 ( Gemco Co., Ltd.); PF636, PF656, PF6320 or PF6520 (manufactured by OMNOVA); KH-20 (manufactured by Asahi Kasei Co., Ltd.); FTX-204G, 208G, 218G, 230G, 204D, 208D, 212D, 218D or 222D (Manufactured by Neos Co., Ltd.) may be used. The polysiloxane polymer KP-341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used as a silicon-based surfactant.
 また、界面活性剤は、上記に示すような公知の界面活性剤の他に、テロメリゼーション法(テロマー法ともいわれる)又はオリゴメリゼーション法(オリゴマー法ともいわれる)により製造されたフルオロ脂肪族化合物を用いて合成してもよい。具体的には、このフルオロ脂肪族化合物から導かれたフルオロ脂肪族基を備えた重合体を、界面活性剤として用いてもよい。このフルオロ脂肪族化合物は、例えば、特開2002-90991号公報に記載された方法によって合成できる。
 フルオロ脂肪族基を有する重合体としては、フルオロ脂肪族基を有するモノマーと(ポリ(オキシアルキレン))アクリレート及び/又は(ポリ(オキシアルキレン))メタクリレートとの共重合体が好ましく、不規則に分布しているものでも、ブロック共重合していてもよい。また、ポリ(オキシアルキレン)基としては、ポリ(オキシエチレン)基、ポリ(オキシプロピレン)基、及びポリ(オキシブチレン)基が挙げられ、また、ポリ(オキシエチレンとオキシプロピレンとオキシエチレンとのブロック連結体)やポリ(オキシエチレンとオキシプロピレンとのブロック連結体)等同じ鎖長内に異なる鎖長のアルキレンを有するようなユニットでもよい。更に、フルオロ脂肪族基を有するモノマーと(ポリ(オキシアルキレン))アクリレート(又はメタクリレート)との共重合体は2元共重合体ばかりでなく、異なる2種以上のフルオロ脂肪族基を有するモノマー、及び異なる2種以上の(ポリ(オキシアルキレン))アクリレート(又はメタクリレート)等を同時に共重合した3元系以上の共重合体でもよい。
 例えば、市販の界面活性剤としては、メガファックF178、F-470、F-473、F-475、F-476、F-472(DIC(株)製)、C13基を有するアクリレート(又はメタクリレート)と(ポリ(オキシアルキレン))アクリレート(又はメタクリレート)との共重合体、C基を有するアクリレート(又はメタクリレート)と(ポリ(オキシエチレン))アクリレート(又はメタクリレート)と(ポリ(オキシプロピレン))アクリレート(又はメタクリレート)との共重合体が挙げられる。
 また、米国特許出願公開第2008/0248425号明細書の段落[0280]に記載されているフッ素系及び/又はシリコン系以外の界面活性剤を使用してもよい。
Further, the surfactant is a fluoroaliphatic compound produced by a telomerization method (also referred to as a telomer method) or an oligomerization method (also referred to as an oligomer method) in addition to the known surfactants as shown above. May be synthesized using. Specifically, a polymer having a fluoroaliphatic group derived from this fluoroaliphatic compound may be used as a surfactant. This fluoroaliphatic compound can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in JP-A-2002-090991.
As the polymer having a fluoroaliphatic group, a copolymer of a monomer having a fluoroaliphatic group and (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylate and / or (poly (oxyalkylene)) methacrylate is preferable, and the polymer is irregularly distributed. It may be a block copolymerized product. Examples of the poly (oxyalkylene) group include a poly (oxyethylene) group, a poly (oxypropylene) group, and a poly (oxybutylene) group, and poly (oxyethylene, oxypropylene, and oxyethylene). It may be a unit having alkylenes having different chain lengths within the same chain length, such as block conjugate) or poly (block conjugate of oxyethylene and oxypropylene). Further, the copolymer of the monomer having a fluoroaliphatic group and the (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylate (or methacrylate) is not only a binary copolymer, but also a monomer having two or more different fluoroaliphatic groups. A ternary or higher copolymer obtained by simultaneously copolymerizing two or more different (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylates (or methacrylates) or the like may be used.
For example, as commercially available surfactants, Megafac F178, F-470, F- 473, F-475, F-476, F-472 ( manufactured by DIC (Ltd.)), acrylates having a C 6 F 13 group ( or methacrylate) and (poly (oxyalkylene)) acrylate (copolymer of or methacrylate), acrylate having a C 3 F 7 group (or methacrylate) (poly (oxyethylene) and) acrylate (or methacrylate) (poly (Oxypropylene)) Examples thereof include a copolymer with acrylate (or methacrylate).
In addition, surfactants other than the fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants described in paragraph [0280] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425 may be used.
 これら界面活性剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.0005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。
These surfactants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
<溶剤>
 特定レジスト組成物は、溶剤を含む。
 溶剤としては、(M1)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレート、並びに(M2)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸エステル、酢酸エステル、酪酸ブチル、アルコキシプロピオン酸エステル、鎖状ケトン、環状ケトン、ラクトン、及びアルキレンカーボネートからなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの少なくとも一方を含んでいることが好ましい。なお、この溶剤は、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。
<Solvent>
The specific resist composition contains a solvent.
Solvents include (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate, butyl butyrate, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of carbonates. The solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
 本発明者らは、このような溶剤と上述した樹脂(A)とを組み合わせて用いると、組成物の塗布性が向上すると共に、現像欠陥数の少ないパターンが形成可能となることを見出している。その理由は必ずしも明らかではないが、これら溶剤は、上述した樹脂(A)の溶解性、沸点及び粘度のバランスが良いため、組成物膜の膜厚のムラ及びスピンコート中の析出物の発生等を抑制できることに起因していると本発明者らは考えている。 The present inventors have found that when such a solvent is used in combination with the above-mentioned resin (A), the coatability of the composition is improved and a pattern having a small number of development defects can be formed. .. The reason is not always clear, but since these solvents have a good balance of solubility, boiling point and viscosity of the resin (A) described above, uneven film thickness of the composition film and generation of precipitates in spin coating, etc. The present inventors believe that this is due to the ability to suppress.
 成分(M1)としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート、及びプロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテートからなる群より選択される1種以上が好ましく、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)がより好ましい。 As the component (M1), one or more selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate is preferable, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (Ppropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate). PGMEA) is more preferred.
 成分(M2)としては、以下のものが好ましい。
 プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルとしては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、又はプロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル(PGEE)が好ましい。
 乳酸エステルとしては、乳酸エチル、乳酸ブチル、又は乳酸プロピルが好ましい。
 酢酸エステルとしては、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸イソアミル、蟻酸メチル、蟻酸エチル、蟻酸ブチル、蟻酸プロピル、又は酢酸3-メトキシブチルが好ましい。
 アルコキシプロピオン酸エステルとしては、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル(MMP:methyl 3-Methoxypropionate)、又は3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(EEP:ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate)が好ましい。
 鎖状ケトンとしては、1-オクタノン、2-オクタノン、1-ノナノン、2-ノナノン、アセトン、2-ヘプタノン、4-ヘプタノン、1-ヘキサノン、2-ヘキサノン、ジイソブチルケトン、フェニルアセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、アセチルアセトン、アセトニルアセトン、イオノン、ジアセトニルアルコール、アセチルカービノール、アセトフェノン、メチルナフチルケトン、又はメチルアミルケトンが好ましい。
 環状ケトンとしては、メチルシクロヘキサノン、イソホロン、又はシクロヘキサノンが好ましい。
 ラクトンとしては、γ-ブチロラクトンが好ましい。
 アルキレンカーボネートとしては、プロピレンカーボネートが好ましい。
The components (M2) are preferably as follows.
As the propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) or propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE) is preferable.
As the lactate ester, ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, or propyl lactate is preferable.
As the acetic acid ester, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferable.
As the alkoxypropionic acid ester, methyl 3-methoxypropionate (MMP: methyl 3-methoxypropionate) or ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (EEP: ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate) is preferable.
Chain ketones include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl. Ketones, acetylacetones, acetonylacetones, ionones, diacetonyl alcohols, acetylcarbinol, acetophenones, methylnaphthyl ketones, or methylamyl ketones are preferred.
As the cyclic ketone, methylcyclohexanone, isophorone, or cyclohexanone is preferable.
As the lactone, γ-butyrolactone is preferable.
As the alkylene carbonate, propylene carbonate is preferable.
 成分(M2)としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、乳酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、メチルアミルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸ブチル、酢酸ペンチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、又はプロピレンカーボネートが好ましい。 As the component (M2), propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), ethyl lactate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methylamyl ketone, cyclohexanone, butyl acetate, pentyl acetate, γ-butyrolactone, or propylene carbonate is preferable.
 上記成分の他、炭素数が7以上(7~14が好ましく、7~12がより好ましく、7~10が更に好ましい)、かつ、ヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤を用いることが好ましい。 In addition to the above components, it is preferable to use an ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14, more preferably 7 to 12 and even more preferably 7 to 10) and having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
 炭素数が7以上かつヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤としては、酢酸アミル、酢酸2-メチルブチル、酢酸1-メチルブチル、酢酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ペンチル、プロピオン酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ブチル、イソ酪酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ヘプチル、又はブタン酸ブチルが好ましく、酢酸イソアミルがより好ましい。 Ester-based solvents having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms include amyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, butyl propionate, and isobutyl isobutyrate. , Heptyl propionate, or butyl butate is preferred, and isoamyl acetate is more preferred.
 成分(M2)としては、引火点(以下、fpともいう)が37℃以上であるものが好ましい。このような成分(M2)としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(fp:47℃)、乳酸エチル(fp:53℃)、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(fp:49℃)、メチルアミルケトン(fp:42℃)、シクロヘキサノン(fp:44℃)、酢酸ペンチル(fp:45℃)、2-ヒドロキシイソ酪酸メチル(fp:45℃)、γ-ブチロラクトン(fp:101℃)、又はプロピレンカーボネート(fp:132℃)が好ましい。これらのうち、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、乳酸エチル、酢酸ペンチル、又はシクロヘキサノンがより好ましく、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、又は乳酸エチルが更に好ましい。
 なお、ここで「引火点」とは、東京化成工業株式会社又はシグマアルドリッチ社の試薬カタログに記載されている値を意味している。
The component (M2) preferably has a flash point (hereinafter, also referred to as fp) of 37 ° C. or higher. Examples of such a component (M2) include propylene glycol monomethyl ether (fp: 47 ° C.), ethyl lactate (fp: 53 ° C.), ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (fp: 49 ° C.), and methylamyl ketone (fp: 42 ° C.). ℃), cyclohexanone (fp: 44 ° C), pentyl acetate (fp: 45 ° C), methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate (fp: 45 ° C), γ-butyrolactone (fp: 101 ° C), or propylene carbonate (fp: 132 ° C). ℃) is preferable. Of these, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethyl lactate, pentyl acetate, or cyclohexanone is more preferable, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether or ethyl lactate is even more preferable.
Here, the "flash point" means a value described in the reagent catalog of Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. or Sigma-Aldrich Co., Ltd.
 成分(M1)と成分(M2)との混合溶剤における混合の質量比(M1/M2)は、「100/0」~「15/85」の範囲内にあることが好ましく、「100/0」~「40/60」の範囲内にあることがより好ましい。このような構成を採用すると、現像欠陥数を更に減少させることが可能となる。 The mass ratio (M1 / M2) of the mixture of the component (M1) and the component (M2) in the mixed solvent is preferably in the range of "100/0" to "15/85", and is preferably "100/0". More preferably, it is in the range of "40/60". By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce the number of development defects.
 上述した通り、溶剤は、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。この場合、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分の含有量は、溶剤の全量に対して、30質量%以下の範囲内が好ましく、5~30質量%の範囲内がより好ましい。 As described above, the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2). In this case, the content of the components other than the components (M1) and (M2) is preferably in the range of 30% by mass or less and more preferably in the range of 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
 特定レジスト組成物中の溶剤の含有量は、固形分濃度が0.5~30.0質量%となるように定めることが好ましく、1.0~20.0質量%となるように定めることがより好ましい。こうすると、特定レジスト組成物の塗布性がより優れる。 The content of the solvent in the specific resist composition is preferably set so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30.0% by mass, and is set to 1.0 to 20.0% by mass. More preferred. In this way, the applicability of the specific resist composition is more excellent.
<その他の添加剤>
 特定レジスト組成物は、更に、上述した以外の樹脂、架橋剤、酸増殖剤、染料、可塑剤、光増感剤、光吸収剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、溶解阻止剤、又は溶解促進剤等を含んでいてもよい。
<Other additives>
The specific resist composition further contains a resin other than those described above, a cross-linking agent, an acid growth agent, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, an alkali-soluble resin, a dissolution inhibitor, a dissolution accelerator and the like. You may be.
[パターン形成方法]
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、下記工程1~4を含む。
工程1:本発明の精製方法により、レジスト組成物を精製する工程
工程2:精製されたレジスト組成物を用いて、支持体(基板上)にレジスト膜を形成する工程
工程3:レジスト膜を露光する工程
工程4:現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程
 以下、上記それぞれの工程の手順について詳述する。
[Pattern formation method]
The pattern forming method of the present invention includes the following steps 1 to 4.
Step 1: Purify the resist composition by the purification method of the present invention Step 2: Form a resist film on the support (on the substrate) using the purified resist composition Step 3: Expose the resist film Step 4: Step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern The procedure of each of the above steps will be described in detail below.
〔工程1;精製工程〕
 本発明の精製方法については、既述のとおりである。
 また、レジスト組成物としては、レジスト組成物を使用できる。特定レジスト組成物については、既述のとおりである。
[Step 1; Purification step]
The purification method of the present invention is as described above.
Further, as the resist composition, a resist composition can be used. The specific resist composition is as described above.
<その他の精製処理、レジスト組成物の保管>
 本発明のパターン形成方法において使用されるレジスト組成物中においては、金属原子の含有量が低減されているのが好ましい。レジスト組成物中において金属原子の含有量を低減する具体的な方法としては、レジスト組成物中の各種材料を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する方法、組成物中の各種材料を構成する原料に対してフィルタ濾過を行う方法、及び装置内をテフロン(登録商標)でライニングする等してコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う方法等が挙げられる。
<Other purification treatment, storage of resist composition>
In the resist composition used in the pattern forming method of the present invention, it is preferable that the content of metal atoms is reduced. Specific methods for reducing the content of metal atoms in the resist composition include a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials in the resist composition, and various materials in the composition. Examples thereof include a method of filtering the constituent raw materials with a filter, and a method of distilling under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
 また、組成物中の金属原子の含有量を低減する方法としては、レジスト組成物に対して吸着材による除去を行う方法も挙げられる。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができ、例えば、シリカゲル及びゼオライト等の無機系吸着材、並びに活性炭等の有機系吸着材を使用できる。
 また、組成物中の金属原子の含有量を低減するためには、製造工程における金属不純物の混入を防止することが必要である。製造装置から金属不純物が十分に除去されたかどうかは、製造装置の洗浄に使用された洗浄液中に含まれる金属成分の含有量を測定することで確認できる。
Further, as a method for reducing the content of metal atoms in the composition, there is also a method of removing the resist composition with an adsorbent. As the adsorbent, a known adsorbent can be used. For example, an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used.
Further, in order to reduce the content of metal atoms in the composition, it is necessary to prevent the mixing of metal impurities in the manufacturing process. Whether or not the metal impurities have been sufficiently removed from the manufacturing equipment can be confirmed by measuring the content of the metal components contained in the cleaning liquid used for cleaning the manufacturing equipment.
 レジスト組成物の製造装置の内部は、窒素等の不活性ガスによってガス置換を行うことが好ましい。これにより、酸素等の活性ガスが組成物中に溶解することを抑制できる。特定レジスト組成物は各種精製を経た後、清浄な容器に充填される。容器に充填された組成物は、冷蔵保存されることが好ましい。これにより、経時による性能劣化が抑制される。組成物の容器への充填が完了してから、冷蔵保存を開始するまでの時間は短い程好ましく、一般的には24時間以内であり、16時間以内が好ましく、12時間以内がより好ましく、10時間以内が更に好ましい。保存温度は0~15℃が好ましく、0~10℃がより好ましく、0~5℃が更に好ましい。 It is preferable that the inside of the resist composition manufacturing apparatus is gas-replaced with an inert gas such as nitrogen. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the dissolution of the active gas such as oxygen in the composition. The specific resist composition undergoes various purifications and then is filled in a clean container. The composition filled in the container is preferably stored refrigerated. As a result, performance deterioration over time is suppressed. The shorter the time from the completion of filling the composition into the container to the start of refrigerated storage, the more preferably, generally within 24 hours, preferably within 16 hours, more preferably within 12 hours, and 10 Within hours is even more preferred. The storage temperature is preferably 0 to 15 ° C, more preferably 0 to 10 ° C, and even more preferably 0 to 5 ° C.
〔工程2:レジスト膜形成工程〕
 工程2は、精製されたレジスト組成物を用いて、支持体(基板上)にレジスト膜を形成する工程である。
[Step 2: Resist film forming step]
Step 2 is a step of forming a resist film on the support (on the substrate) using the purified resist composition.
 次に、レジスト組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する方法を説明する。
 レジスト組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する方法としては、レジスト組成物を基板上に塗布する方法が挙げられる。
Next, a method of forming a resist film on the substrate using the resist composition will be described.
Examples of the method of forming a resist film on a substrate using the resist composition include a method of applying the resist composition on the substrate.
 レジスト組成物は、集積回路素子の製造に使用されるような基板(例:シリコン、二酸化シリコン被覆)上に、スピナー又はコーター等の適当な塗布方法により塗布できる。塗布方法としては、スピナーを用いたスピン塗布が好ましい。スピナーを用いたスピン塗布をする際の回転数は、1000~3000rpmが好ましい。
 レジスト組成物の塗布後、基板を乾燥し、レジスト膜を形成してもよい。なお、必要により、レジスト膜の下層に、各種下地膜(無機膜、有機膜、反射防止膜)を形成してもよい。
The resist composition can be applied onto a substrate (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coating) such as that used in the manufacture of integrated circuit elements by an appropriate coating method such as a spinner or coater. As a coating method, spin coating using a spinner is preferable. The rotation speed at the time of spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
After applying the resist composition, the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. If necessary, various undercoat films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
 乾燥方法としては、加熱して乾燥する方法が挙げられる。加熱は通常の露光機、及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で行うことができ、ホットプレート等を用いて行ってもよい。加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。加熱時間は30~1000秒が好ましく、60~800秒がより好ましく、60~600秒が更に好ましい。 Examples of the drying method include a method of heating and drying. The heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be performed by using a hot plate or the like. The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C. The heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, still more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
 レジスト膜の膜厚は特に制限されないが、より高精度な微細パターンを形成できる点から、10~150nmが好ましく、15~100nmがより好ましい。 The film thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but 10 to 150 nm is preferable, and 15 to 100 nm is more preferable, from the viewpoint of forming a fine pattern with higher accuracy.
 なお、レジスト膜の上層にトップコート組成物を用いてトップコートを形成してもよい。
 トップコート組成物は、レジスト膜と混合せず、更にレジスト膜上層に均一に塗布できることが好ましい。
 また、トップコートの形成前にレジスト膜を乾燥することが好ましい。次いで、得られたレジスト膜上に、上記レジスト膜の形成方法と同様の手段によりトップコート組成物を塗布し、更に乾燥することで、トップコートを形成できる。
 トップコートの膜厚は、10~200nmが好ましく、20~100nmがより好ましい。
 トップコート組成物は、例えば、樹脂と添加剤と溶剤とを含む。
 上記樹脂としては、上述の疎水性樹脂と同様の樹脂を使用できる。樹脂の含有量は、トップコート組成物の全固形分に対して、50~99.9質量%が好ましく、60~99.7質量%がより好ましい。
 上記添加剤としては、上述の酸拡散制御剤を使用できる。また、N-オキシルフリーラジカル基を有する化合物のようなラジカルトラップ基を有する化合物も使用できる。このような化合物としては、例えば、[4-(ベンゾイルオキシ)-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジノオキシ]ラジカルが挙げられる。添加剤の含有量は、トップコート組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましい。
 上記溶剤は、レジスト膜を溶解しないのが好ましく、例えば、アルコール系溶剤(4-メチル-2-ペンタノール等)、エーテル系溶剤(ジイソアミルエーテル等)、エステル系溶剤、フッ素系溶剤、及び炭化水素系溶剤(n-デカン等)が挙げられる。
 トップコート組成物中の溶剤の含有量は、固形分濃度が0.5~30質量%となるように定めることが好ましく、1~20質量%となるように定めることがより好ましい。
 また、トップコート組成物は、上述の添加剤以外に界面活性剤を含んでもよく、上記界面活性剤としては、本発明の組成物が含んでもよい界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤の含有量は、トップコート組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2質量%が好ましく、0.0005~1質量%がより好ましい。
 その他にも、トップコートは、特に限定されず、従来公知のトップコートを、従来公知の方法によって形成でき、例えば、特開2014-059543号公報の段落[0072]~[0082]の記載に基づいてトップコートを形成できる。
 例えば、特開2013-61648号公報に記載されたような塩基性化合物を含むトップコートを、レジスト膜上に形成することが好ましい。トップコートが含み得る塩基性化合物の具体的な例は、本発明の組成物が含んでいてもよい塩基性化合物が挙げられる。
 また、トップコートは、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、水酸基、チオール基、カルボニル結合及びエステル結合からなる群より選択される基又は結合を少なくとも一つ含む化合物を含むことが好ましい。
A top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film by using the top coat composition.
It is preferable that the topcoat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film.
Further, it is preferable to dry the resist film before forming the top coat. Next, the topcoat composition can be formed on the obtained resist film by applying the topcoat composition on the obtained resist film by the same means as the method for forming the resist film and further drying.
The film thickness of the top coat is preferably 10 to 200 nm, more preferably 20 to 100 nm.
The topcoat composition contains, for example, a resin, an additive and a solvent.
As the resin, the same resin as the hydrophobic resin described above can be used. The content of the resin is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.7% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
As the additive, the acid diffusion control agent described above can be used. Further, a compound having a radical trap group such as a compound having an N-oxyl-free radical group can also be used. Examples of such a compound include [4- (benzoyloxy) -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidinooxy] radicals. The content of the additive is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
The solvent preferably does not dissolve the resist film, for example, an alcohol solvent (4-methyl-2-pentanol, etc.), an ether solvent (diisoamyl ether, etc.), an ester solvent, a fluorine solvent, and a hydrocarbon. Examples thereof include hydrogen-based solvents (n-decane and the like).
The content of the solvent in the topcoat composition is preferably set so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
In addition, the top coat composition may contain a surfactant in addition to the above-mentioned additives, and as the above-mentioned surfactant, a surfactant which may be contained in the composition of the present invention can be used. The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1% by mass, based on the total solid content of the topcoat composition.
In addition, the top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method. For example, based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP-A-2014-059543. Can form a top coat.
For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound as described in JP2013-61648A on the resist film. Specific examples of basic compounds that can be contained in the top coat include basic compounds that may be contained in the composition of the present invention.
Further, the top coat preferably contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond and an ester bond.
〔工程3:露光工程〕
 工程3は、レジスト膜を露光する工程である。
 露光の方法としては、形成したレジスト膜に所定のマスクを通して活性光線又は放射線を照射する方法が挙げられる。
 活性光線又は放射線としては、赤外光、可視光、紫外光、遠紫外光、極紫外光、X線、及び電子線が挙げられ、好ましくは250nm以下、より好ましくは220nm以下、特に好ましくは1~200nmの波長の遠紫外光、具体的には、KrFエキシマレーザー(248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(193nm)、Fエキシマレーザー(157nm)、EUV(13nm)、X線、及び電子ビームが挙げられる。
[Step 3: Exposure step]
Step 3 is a step of exposing the resist film.
Examples of the exposure method include a method of irradiating the formed resist film with active light rays or radiation through a predetermined mask.
Examples of the active light or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, extreme ultraviolet light, X-ray, and electron beam, preferably 250 nm or less, more preferably 220 nm or less, and particularly preferably 1. far ultraviolet light at a wavelength of ~ 200 nm, specifically, KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimer laser (193 nm), F 2 excimer laser (157nm), EUV (13nm) , X -ray, and electron beam and the like ..
 露光後、現像を行う前にベーク(加熱)を行うことが好ましい。ベークにより露光部の反応が促進され、感度及びパターン形状がより良好となる。
 加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。
 加熱時間は10~1000秒が好ましく、10~180秒がより好ましく、30~120秒が更に好ましい。
 加熱は通常の露光機、及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で行うことができ、ホットプレート等を用いて行ってもよい。
 この工程は露光後ベークともいう。
It is preferable to bake (heat) after exposure and before developing. Baking accelerates the reaction of the exposed area, resulting in better sensitivity and pattern shape.
The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
The heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, still more preferably 30 to 120 seconds.
The heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be performed by using a hot plate or the like.
This process is also called post-exposure baking.
〔工程4:現像工程〕
 工程4は、現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程である。
[Step 4: Development step]
Step 4 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern.
 現像方法としては、現像液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、基板表面に現像液を表面張力によって盛り上げて一定時間静止することで現像する方法(パドル法)、基板表面に現像液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)、及び一定速度で回転している基板上に一定速度で現像液吐出ノズルをスキャンしながら現像液を吐出しつづける方法(ダイナミックディスペンス法)が挙げられる。
 また、現像を行う工程の後に、他の溶剤に置換しながら、現像を停止する工程を実施してもよい。
 現像時間は未露光部の樹脂が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に制限はなく、10~300秒が好ましく、20~120秒がより好ましい。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃がより好ましい。
As a developing method, a method of immersing the substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method of raising the developing solution on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and allowing it to stand still for a certain period of time (paddle method). , A method of spraying the developer on the surface of the substrate (spray method), and a method of continuing to eject the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic discharge method). Can be mentioned.
Further, after the step of performing the development, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting with another solvent.
The development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed portion is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developing solution is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
 現像液としては、アルカリ現像液、及び有機溶剤現像液が挙げられる。
 アルカリ現像液は、アルカリを含むアルカリ水溶液を用いることが好ましい。アルカリ水溶液の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドに代表される4級アンモニウム塩、無機アルカリ、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アルコールアミン、又は環状アミン等を含むアルカリ水溶液が挙げられる。なかでも、アルカリ現像液は、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)に代表される4級アンモニウム塩の水溶液であることが好ましい。アルカリ現像液には、アルコール類、界面活性剤等を適当量添加してもよい。アルカリ現像液のアルカリ濃度は、通常、0.1~20質量%である。また、アルカリ現像液のpHは、通常、10.0~15.0である。
Examples of the developing solution include an alkaline developing solution and an organic solvent developing solution.
As the alkaline developer, it is preferable to use an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali. The type of alkaline aqueous solution is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, a cyclic amine, and the like. An alkaline aqueous solution can be mentioned. Among them, the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). An appropriate amount of alcohols, surfactants and the like may be added to the alkaline developer. The alkali concentration of the alkaline developer is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass. The pH of the alkaline developer is usually 10.0 to 15.0.
 有機溶剤現像液とは、有機溶剤を含む現像液である。
 有機溶剤現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の蒸気圧(混合溶剤である場合は全体としての蒸気圧)は、20℃において、5kPa以下が好ましく、3kPa以下がより好ましく、2kPa以下が更に好ましい。有機溶剤の蒸気圧を5kPa以下にすることにより、現像液の基板上又は現像カップ内での蒸発が抑制され、ウエハ面内の温度均一性が向上し、結果としてウエハ面内の寸法均一性が良化する。
The organic solvent developer is a developer containing an organic solvent.
The vapor pressure of the organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developer (in the case of a mixed solvent, the vapor pressure as a whole) is preferably 5 kPa or less, more preferably 3 kPa or less, and further preferably 2 kPa or less at 20 ° C. By reducing the vapor pressure of the organic solvent to 5 kPa or less, evaporation of the developer on the substrate or in the developing cup is suppressed, the temperature uniformity in the wafer surface is improved, and as a result, the dimensional uniformity in the wafer surface is improved. Improve.
 有機溶剤現像液に用いられる有機溶剤としては、公知の有機溶剤が挙げられ、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、及び炭化水素系溶剤が挙げられる。 Examples of the organic solvent used in the organic solvent developing solution include known organic solvents, and examples thereof include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents.
 有機溶剤現像液に含まれる有機溶剤は、上記露光工程においてEUV及び電子線を用いる場合において、レジスト膜の膨潤を抑制できるという点から、炭素原子数が7以上(7~14が好ましく、7~12がより好ましく、7~10が更に好ましい)、かつ、ヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤を用いることが好ましい。 The organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developing solution has 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14 and 7 to 14) from the viewpoint that swelling of the resist film can be suppressed when EUV and an electron beam are used in the exposure step. 12 is more preferable, and 7 to 10 is more preferable), and it is preferable to use an ester solvent having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
 上記エステル系溶剤のヘテロ原子は、炭素原子及び水素原子以外の原子であって、例えば、酸素原子、窒素原子、及び硫黄原子等が挙げられる。ヘテロ原子数は、2以下が好ましい。 The hetero atom of the ester-based solvent is an atom other than a carbon atom and a hydrogen atom, and examples thereof include an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms is preferably 2 or less.
 炭素原子数が7以上かつヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤としては、酢酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸2-メチルブチル、酢酸1-メチルブチル、酢酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ペンチル、プロピオン酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ブチル、イソ酪酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ヘプチル、又はブタン酸ブチル等が好ましく、酢酸イソアミルがより好ましい。 Ester-based solvents having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms include amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, and butyl propionate. , Isobutyl isobutyrate, heptyl propionate, butyl butane and the like are preferred, and isoamyl acetate is more preferred.
 有機溶剤現像液に含まれる有機溶剤は、上記露光工程においてEUV及び電子線を用いる場合において、炭素原子数が7以上かつヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤に代えて、上記エステル系溶剤及び上記炭化水素系溶剤の混合溶剤、又は上記ケトン系溶剤及び上記炭化水素溶剤の混合溶剤を用いてもよい。この場合においても、レジスト膜の膨潤の抑制に効果的である。 When using EUV and an electron beam in the exposure step, the organic solvent contained in the organic solvent developing solution is replaced with the ester solvent and the ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less hetero atoms. A mixed solvent of the above-mentioned hydrocarbon solvent or the above-mentioned ketone solvent and the above-mentioned hydrocarbon solvent may be used. Even in this case, it is effective in suppressing the swelling of the resist film.
 エステル系溶剤と炭化水素系溶剤とを組み合わせて用いる場合には、エステル系溶剤として酢酸イソアミルを用いることが好ましい。また、炭化水素系溶剤としては、レジスト膜の溶解性を調製するという点から、飽和炭化水素溶剤(例えば、オクタン、ノナン、デカン、ドデカン、ウンデカン、ヘキサデカン等)が好ましい。 When an ester solvent and a hydrocarbon solvent are used in combination, it is preferable to use isoamyl acetate as the ester solvent. Further, as the hydrocarbon solvent, a saturated hydrocarbon solvent (for example, octane, nonane, decane, dodecane, undecane, hexadecane, etc.) is preferable from the viewpoint of adjusting the solubility of the resist film.
 ケトン系溶剤と炭化水素系溶剤とを組み合わせて用いる場合には、ケトン系溶剤として2-ヘプタノンを用いることが好ましい。また、炭化水素系溶剤としては、レジスト膜の溶解性を調製するという点から、飽和炭化水素溶剤(例えば、オクタン、ノナン、デカン、ドデカン、ウンデカン、ヘキサデカン等)が好ましい。 When a ketone solvent and a hydrocarbon solvent are used in combination, it is preferable to use 2-heptanone as the ketone solvent. Further, as the hydrocarbon solvent, a saturated hydrocarbon solvent (for example, octane, nonane, decane, dodecane, undecane, hexadecane, etc.) is preferable from the viewpoint of adjusting the solubility of the resist film.
 上記の混合溶剤を用いる場合において、炭化水素系溶剤の含有量は、レジスト膜の溶剤溶解性に依存するため、特に限定されず、適宜調製して必要量を決定すればよい。 When the above mixed solvent is used, the content of the hydrocarbon solvent depends on the solvent solubility of the resist membrane, and is not particularly limited, and the required amount may be determined as appropriate.
 上記の有機溶剤は、複数混合してもよいし、上記以外の溶剤や水と混合し使用してもよい。但し、本発明の効果を十二分に奏するためには、現像液全体としての含水率が10質量%未満であることが好ましく、実質的に水分を含有しないことがより好ましい。現像液における有機溶剤(複数混合の場合は合計)の濃度は、50質量%以上が好ましく、50~100質量%がより好ましく、85~100質量%が更に好ましく、90~100質量%が特に好ましく、95~100質量%が最も好ましい。 A plurality of the above organic solvents may be mixed, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above or water and used. However, in order to fully exert the effect of the present invention, the water content of the developing solution as a whole is preferably less than 10% by mass, and more preferably substantially no water is contained. The concentration of the organic solvent (total in the case of a plurality of mixture) in the developing solution is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, further preferably 85 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass. , 95-100% by mass is most preferable.
〔他の工程〕
 上記パターン形成方法は、工程4の後に、リンス液を用いて洗浄する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 現像液を用いて現像する工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液としては、例えば、純水が挙げられる。なお、純水には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
 リンス液には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
[Other processes]
The pattern forming method preferably includes a step of washing with a rinsing solution after the step 4.
Examples of the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the step of developing with the developing solution include pure water. An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to pure water.
An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
 リンス工程の方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、一定速度で回転している基板上にリンス液を吐出しつづける方法(回転塗布法)、リンス液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、及び基板表面にリンス液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)等が挙げられる。
 また、本発明のパターン形成方法は、リンス工程の後に加熱工程(Post Bake)を含んでいてもよい。本工程により、ベークによりパターン間及びパターン内部に残留した現像液及びリンス液が除去される。また、本工程により、レジストパターンがなまされ、パターンの表面荒れが改善される効果もある。リンス工程の後の加熱工程は、通常40~250℃(好ましくは90~200℃)で、通常10秒間~3分間(好ましくは30~120秒間)行う。
The method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, but for example, a method of continuously discharging the rinsing liquid onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), or immersing the substrate in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. Examples thereof include a method (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinse liquid on the substrate surface (spray method).
In addition, the pattern forming method of the present invention may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse liquid remaining between the patterns and inside the patterns are removed by baking. In addition, this step has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving the surface roughness of the pattern. The heating step after the rinsing step is usually performed at 40 to 250 ° C. (preferably 90 to 200 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 to 120 seconds).
 また、形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板のエッチング処理を実施してもよい。つまり、工程4にて形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は下層膜及び基板)を加工して、基板にパターンを形成してもよい。
 基板(又は下層膜及び基板)の加工方法は特に限定されないが、工程4で形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は下層膜及び基板)に対してドライエッチングを行うことにより、基板にパターンを形成する方法が好ましい。
 ドライエッチングは、1段のエッチングであっても、複数段からなるエッチングであってもよい。エッチングが複数段からなるエッチングである場合、各段のエッチングは同一の処理であっても異なる処理であってもよい。
 エッチングは、公知の方法をいずれも用いることができ、各種条件等は、基板の種類又は用途等に応じて、適宜、決定される。例えば、国際光工学会紀要(Proc.of SPIE)Vol.6924,692420(2008)、特開2009-267112号公報等に準じて、エッチングを実施できる。また、「半導体プロセス教本 第四版 2007年刊行 発行人:SEMIジャパン」の「第4章 エッチング」に記載の方法に準ずることもできる。
 なかでも、ドライエッチングとしては、酸素プラズマエッチングが好ましい。
Further, the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 4 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) to form the pattern on the substrate.
The processing method of the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but the pattern is formed on the substrate by performing dry etching on the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) using the pattern formed in step 4 as a mask. The method of forming is preferred.
The dry etching may be one-step etching or multi-step etching. When the etching is an etching consisting of a plurality of stages, the etching of each stage may be the same process or different processes.
Any known method can be used for etching, and various conditions and the like are appropriately determined according to the type and application of the substrate. For example, the Bulletin of the International Society of Optical Engineering (Proc. Of SPIE) Vol. Etching can be performed according to 6924, 692420 (2008), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-267112, and the like. In addition, the method described in "Chapter 4 Etching" of "Semiconductor Process Textbook 4th Edition 2007 Published Publisher: SEMI Japan" can also be applied.
Of these, oxygen plasma etching is preferable as the dry etching.
 本発明のパターン形成方法において使用されるレジスト組成物以外の各種材料(例えば現像液、リンス液、反射防止膜形成用組成物、トップコート形成用組成物等)は、金属等の不純物(例えば、Na、K、Ca、Fe、Cu、Mg、Al、Li、Cr、Ni、Sn、Ag、As、Au、Ba、Cd、Co、Pb、Ti、V、W、及びZn等)が少ないほど好ましい。これら材料に含まれる不純物の含有量としては、例えば、1質量ppm以下が好ましい。 Various materials other than the resist composition used in the pattern forming method of the present invention (for example, a developing solution, a rinsing solution, an antireflection film forming composition, a top coat forming composition, etc.) are impurities such as metals (for example, a composition for forming a top coat). The smaller the amount of Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, W, Zn, etc.), the more preferable. .. The content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably, for example, 1 mass ppm or less.
 レジスト組成物以外の各種材料中の金属等の不純物の低減方法としては、例えば、フィルタを用いた濾過が挙げられる。フィルタ孔径としては、ポアサイズ100nm未満が好ましく、10nm以下がより好ましく、5nm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタとしては、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、又はナイロン製のフィルタが好ましい。フィルタは、上記フィルタ素材とイオン交換メディアとを組み合わせた複合材料で構成されていてもよい。フィルタは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したものを用いてもよい。フィルタ濾過工程では、複数種類のフィルタを直列又は並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種類のフィルタを使用する場合は、孔径及び/又は素材が異なるフィルタを組み合わせて使用してもよい。また、各種材料を複数回濾過してもよく、複数回濾過する工程が循環濾過工程であってもよい。 As a method for reducing impurities such as metals in various materials other than the resist composition, for example, filtration using a filter can be mentioned. The filter pore size is preferably less than 100 nm, more preferably 10 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or less. As the filter, a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon is preferable. The filter may be composed of a composite material in which the above filter material and an ion exchange medium are combined. The filter may be one that has been previously washed with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When a plurality of types of filters are used, filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination. Further, various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering the various materials a plurality of times may be a circulation filtration step.
 また、レジスト組成物以外の各種材料中の金属等の不純物を低減する方法としては、各種材料を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する方法、各種材料を構成する原料に対してフィルタ濾過を行う方法、及び装置内をテフロン(登録商標)でライニングする等してコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う方法等が挙げられる。 Further, as a method of reducing impurities such as metals in various materials other than the resist composition, a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials, and a filter for the raw material constituting various materials. Examples thereof include a method of performing filtration and a method of performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
 また、レジスト組成物以外の各種材料中の金属等の不純物を低減する方法としては、上述したフィルタ濾過の他、吸着材による不純物の除去を行ってもよく、フィルタ濾過と吸着材とを組み合わせて使用してもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができ、例えば、シリカゲル及びゼオライト等の無機系吸着材、並びに活性炭等の有機系吸着材を使用できる。上記レジスト組成物以外の各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減するためには、製造工程における金属不純物の混入を防止することが必要である。製造装置から金属不純物が十分に除去されたかどうかは、製造装置の洗浄に使用された洗浄液中に含まれる金属成分の含有量を測定することで確認できる。 Further, as a method for reducing impurities such as metals in various materials other than the resist composition, impurities may be removed by an adsorbent in addition to the above-mentioned filter filtration, and the filter filtration and the adsorbent may be combined. You may use it. As the adsorbent, a known adsorbent can be used. For example, an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used. In order to reduce impurities such as metals contained in various materials other than the resist composition, it is necessary to prevent the mixing of metal impurities in the manufacturing process. Whether or not the metal impurities have been sufficiently removed from the manufacturing equipment can be confirmed by measuring the content of the metal components contained in the cleaning liquid used for cleaning the manufacturing equipment.
 リンス液等の有機系処理液には、静電気の帯電、引き続き生じる静電気放電に伴う、薬液配管及び各種パーツ(フィルタ、O-リング、チューブ等)の故障を防止する為、導電性の化合物を添加してもよい。導電性の化合物は特に制限されないが、例えば、メタノールが挙げられる。添加量は特に制限されないが、好ましい現像特性又はリンス特性を維持する観点で、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。
 薬液配管としては、SUS(ステンレス鋼)、又は帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、若しくはフッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、パーフロオロアルコキシ樹脂等)で被膜された各種配管を用いることができる。フィルタ及びO-リングに関しても同様に、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、又はフッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、パーフロオロアルコキシ樹脂等)を用いることができる。
Conductive compounds are added to organic treatment liquids such as rinse liquids to prevent failures of chemical liquid piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. You may. The conductive compound is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methanol. The amount to be added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of maintaining preferable development characteristics or rinse characteristics.
As the chemical solution pipe, various pipes coated with SUS (stainless steel) or antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perflooloalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used. Similarly, for the filter and the O-ring, antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used.
 本発明の方法により形成されるパターンに対して、パターンの表面荒れを改善する方法を適用してもよい。パターンの表面荒れを改善する方法としては、例えば、国際公開第2014/002808号に開示された水素を含有するガスのプラズマによってパターンを処理する方法が挙げられる。その他にも、特開2004-235468号公報、米国特許出願公開第2010/0020297号明細書、特開2008-83384号公報、及びProc. of SPIE Vol.8328 83280N-1”EUV Resist Curing Technique for LWR Reduction and Etch Selectivity Enhancement”に記載されているような公知の方法が挙げられる。 A method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern may be applied to the pattern formed by the method of the present invention. Examples of the method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern include a method of treating the pattern with a plasma of a hydrogen-containing gas disclosed in International Publication No. 2014/002808. In addition, JP-A-2004-235468, US Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0020297, JP-A-2008-83384, and Proc. Of SPIE Vol. 8328 83280N-1 "EUV Resist Curing Technology for LWR Reduction and Etch Sensitivity Enhancement" can be mentioned.
 形成されるパターンがライン状である場合、パターン高さをライン幅で割った値で求められるアスペクト比が、2.5以下が好ましく、2.1以下がより好ましく、1.7以下が更に好ましい。
 形成されるパターンがトレンチ(溝)パターン状又はコンタクトホールパターン状である場合、パターン高さをトレンチ幅又はホール径で割った値で求められるアスペクト比が、4.0以下が好ましく、3.5以下がより好ましく、3.0以下が更に好ましい。
When the pattern to be formed is line-shaped, the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the line width is preferably 2.5 or less, more preferably 2.1 or less, still more preferably 1.7 or less. ..
When the pattern to be formed is a trench pattern or a contact hole pattern, the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the trench width or the hole diameter is preferably 4.0 or less, preferably 3.5. The following is more preferable, and 3.0 or less is further preferable.
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、DSA(Directed Self-Assembly)におけるガイドパターン形成(例えば、ACS Nano Vol.4 No.8 Page4815-4823参照)にも用いることができる。 The pattern forming method of the present invention can also be used for guide pattern forming in DSA (Directed Self-Assembly) (see, for example, ACS Nano Vol. 4 No. 8 Page 4815-4823).
 また、上記の方法によって形成されたパターンは、例えば、特開平3-270227号公報、及び特開2013-164509号公報に開示されたスペーサープロセスの芯材(コア)として使用できる。 Further, the pattern formed by the above method can be used as, for example, the core material (core) of the spacer process disclosed in JP-A-3-270227 and JP2013-164509.
[電子デバイスの製造方法]
 また、本発明は、上記したパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法にも関する。上記電子デバイスとしては、電気電子機器(家電、OA(Offivce Automation)、メディア関連機器、光学用機器、及び通信機器等)に、好適に搭載されるものである。
[Manufacturing method of electronic devices]
The present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the above-mentioned pattern forming method. The electronic device is preferably mounted on an electric / electronic device (home appliance, OA (Office Automation), media-related device, optical device, communication device, etc.).
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の各種成分]
〔酸分解性樹脂(樹脂A)〕
 表3及び表7に示される樹脂A(樹脂A-1~A-6、A-8~A-20)を以下に示す。
 樹脂A-1~A-6、A-8~A-20は、後述する樹脂A-1の合成方法(合成例1)に準じて合成したものを用いた。表1に、後掲に示される各繰り返し単位の組成比(モル比;左から順に対応)、重量平均分子量(Mw)、及び分散度(Mw/Mn)を示す。
 なお、樹脂A-1~A-6、A-8~A-20の重量平均分子量(Mw)及び分散度(Mw/Mn)はGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定した(ポリスチレン換算量である)。また、樹脂の組成比(モル%比)は、13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した。
[Various components of actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition]
[Acid-degradable resin (resin A)]
The resins A (resins A-1 to A-6, A-8 to A-20) shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
As the resins A-1 to A-6 and A-8 to A-20, those synthesized according to the method for synthesizing the resin A-1 described later (Synthesis Example 1) were used. Table 1 shows the composition ratio (molar ratio; corresponding in order from the left), weight average molecular weight (Mw), and dispersity (Mw / Mn) of each repeating unit shown later.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) and dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the resins A-1 to A-6 and A-8 to A-20 were measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) (polystyrene equivalent). Is). The composition ratio (mol% ratio) of the resin was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
 表1に示される樹脂A-1~A-6、A-8~A-20の構造式を以下に示す。 The structural formulas of the resins A-1 to A-6 and A-8 to A-20 shown in Table 1 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
<合成例1:樹脂A-1の合成>
 シクロヘキサノン(113g)を窒素気流下にて80℃に加熱した。この液を攪拌しながら、下記式M-1で表されるモノマー(25.5g)、下記式M-2で表されるモノマー(31.6g)、シクロヘキサノン(210g)、及び2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕(6.21g)の混合溶液を6時間かけて滴下し、反応液を得た。滴下終了後、反応液を80℃にて更に2時間攪拌した。得られた反応液を放冷後、多量のメタノール/水(質量比9:1)で再沈殿した後、ろ過し、得られた固体を真空乾燥することで、樹脂A-1を52g得た。
<Synthesis Example 1: Synthesis of Resin A-1>
Cyclohexanone (113 g) was heated to 80 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. While stirring this solution, the monomer represented by the following formula M-1 (25.5 g), the monomer represented by the following formula M-2 (31.6 g), cyclohexanone (210 g), and 2,2'-. A mixed solution of dimethyl azobisisobutyrate [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] (6.21 g) was added dropwise over 6 hours to obtain a reaction solution. After completion of the dropping, the reaction solution was stirred at 80 ° C. for another 2 hours. The obtained reaction solution was allowed to cool, reprecipitated with a large amount of methanol / water (mass ratio 9: 1), filtered, and the obtained solid was vacuum dried to obtain 52 g of resin A-1. ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
 得られた樹脂A-1のGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))から求めた重量平均分子量(Mw:ポリスチレン換算)は6500であり、分散度(Mw/Mn)は1.52であった。13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した組成比はモル比で50/50であった。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw: polystyrene equivalent) determined from the GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) of the obtained resin A-1 was 6500, and the dispersity (Mw / Mn) was 1.52. 13 The composition ratio measured by C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance) was 50/50 in molar ratio.
〔光酸発生剤〕
<第1の光酸発生剤>
 表3及び表7に示される光酸発生剤B(化合物B-1~B-15)の構造を以下に示す。
 なお、化合物B-1~B-15は、上述した化合物(I)に該当する。
[Photoacid generator]
<First photoacid generator>
The structures of the photoacid generators B (Compounds B-1 to B-15) shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
Compounds B-1 to B-15 correspond to the above-mentioned compound (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
<第2の光酸発生剤>
 表3及び表7に示される第2の光酸発生剤(C-1~C-17)の構造を以下に示す。
<Second photoacid generator>
The structures of the second photoacid generators (C-1 to C-17) shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
〔酸拡散制御剤〕
 表3及び表7に示される酸拡散制御剤(化合物D-1~D-5)の構造を以下に示す。
[Acid diffusion control agent]
The structures of the acid diffusion control agents (Compounds D-1 to D-5) shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
〔添加性樹脂(樹脂(B))及びトップコート用樹脂〕
 表3及び表7に示される添加樹脂(E-1~E-11)及び表5に示されるトップコート用樹脂(PT-1~PT-3)は合成したものを用いた。
 表2に、表3及び表7に示される添加樹脂(E-1~E-11)及び表5に示されるトップコート用樹脂(PT-1~PT-3)における繰り返し単位のモル比率、重量平均分子量(Mw)、及び分散度(Mw/Mn)を示す。
 なお、添加樹脂E-1~E-11及びトップコート用樹脂PT-1~PT-3の重量平均分子量(Mw)及び分散度(Mw/Mn)はGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定した(ポリスチレン換算量である)。また、樹脂の組成比(モル%比)は、13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した。
[Additive resin (resin (B)) and topcoat resin]
The additive resins (E-1 to E-11) shown in Tables 3 and 7 and the topcoat resins (PT-1 to PT-3) shown in Table 5 were synthetic ones.
Table 2 shows the molar ratios and weights of the repeating units in the additive resins (E-1 to E-11) shown in Tables 3 and 7 and the topcoat resins (PT-1 to PT-3) shown in Table 5. The average molecular weight (Mw) and the degree of dispersion (Mw / Mn) are shown.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) and dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the added resins E-1 to E-11 and the topcoat resins PT-1 to PT-3 were measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)). (It is a polystyrene-equivalent amount). The composition ratio (mol% ratio) of the resin was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000078
 表2に示される添加樹脂E-1~E-11及びトップコート用樹脂PT-1~PT-3の合成に用いたモノマー構造を以下に示す。 The monomer structures used for the synthesis of the additive resins E-1 to E-11 and the topcoat resins PT-1 to PT-3 shown in Table 2 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
〔界面活性剤〕
 表3、表5及び表7に示される界面活性剤を以下に示す。
 H-1:メガファックF176(DIC(株)製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
 H-3:PF656(OMNOVA社製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
[Surfactant]
The surfactants shown in Tables 3, 5 and 7 are shown below.
H-1: Megafuck F176 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine-based surfactant)
H-3: PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorine-based surfactant)
〔溶剤〕
 表3及び表7に示される溶剤を以下に示す。
 F-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 F-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 F-4:シクロヘキサノン
 F-5:シクロペンタノン
 F-6:2-ヘプタノン
 F-7:乳酸エチル
 F-8:γ-ブチロラクトン
 F-9:プロピレンカーボネート
〔solvent〕
The solvents shown in Tables 3 and 7 are shown below.
F-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
F-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
F-4: Cyclohexanone F-5: Cyclopentanone F-6: 2-Heptanone F-7: Ethyl lactate F-8: γ-Butyrolactone F-9: Propylene carbonate
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の調製及び精製、パターン形成、及び欠陥評価:ArF液浸露光]
〔ArF液浸露光用の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の調製(1)〕
 表3に示した各成分を固形分濃度が4.0質量%となるように混合し、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下「レジスト組成物」ともいう)を調製した。なお、レジスト組成物において、固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を意味する。得られたレジスト組成物を、実施例及び比較例で使用した。
[Preparation and purification of actinic or radiation-sensitive resin compositions, pattern formation, and defect evaluation: ArF immersion exposure]
[Preparation of Actinic Cheilitis or Radiation Sensitive Resin Composition for ArF Immersion Exposure (1)]
Each component shown in Table 3 was mixed so as to have a solid content concentration of 4.0% by mass to prepare an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”). In the resist composition, the solid content means all components other than the solvent. The obtained resist composition was used in Examples and Comparative Examples.
 表3において、各成分の含有量(質量%)は、全固形分に対する含有量を意味する。 In Table 3, the content (mass%) of each component means the content with respect to the total solid content.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000080
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000080
〔ArF液浸露光用の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製(1)〕
 得られた各レジスト組成物(Re-1-0~Re-13-0)に対して、以下に示す手順により、フィルタリングによるろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-1-1~Re-13-1)を得た。
[Purification of Actinic Photosensitive or Radiation Sensitive Resin Composition for ArF Immersion Exposure (1)]
Each of the obtained resist compositions (Re-1-0 to Re-13-0) was filtered by filtering according to the procedure shown below, and the resist compositions (Re-1-1 to Re-) were subjected to filtration treatment. 13-1) was obtained.
<各種フィルタ>
 以下に、まず、表4に示されるフィルタについて各々説明する。
 「Nylon」:
 支持部材に支持されたナイロン膜、臨界表面張力:77dyne/cm
 「PE」:
 支持部材に支持されたポリエチレン膜、臨界表面張力:36dyne/cm
 「PI」:
 ポリイミド膜単体、臨界表面張力:45dyne/cm
<Various filters>
First, each of the filters shown in Table 4 will be described below.
"Nylon":
Nylon film supported by a support member, critical surface tension: 77dyne / cm
"PE":
Polyethylene membrane supported by a support member, critical surface tension: 36 dyne / cm
"PI":
Polyimide film alone, critical surface tension: 45dyne / cm
<精製例1-1>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-1-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順に通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-1-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-1>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-1-0) is passed through the prepared resist composition (Re-1-0) in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-1-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-2>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-2-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第3のフィルタまで通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-2-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-2>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, and the third filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-2-0) is passed from the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-2-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-3、1-6>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表4に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例1-2と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-3-0、Re-6-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-3-1、Re-6-1)を得た。
<Purification Examples 1-3, 1-6>
Filtration of the resist composition (Re-3-0, Re-6-0) by the same method as in Purification Example 1-2 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter are changed to those shown in Table 4. The treatment was carried out to obtain a resist composition (Re-3-1, Re-6-1).
<精製例1-4>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタと第4のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-4-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第4のフィルタまで通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-4-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-4>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, the third filter, and the fourth filter shown in Table 4 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-4-0) is passed from the first filter to the fourth filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-4-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-5>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表4に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例1-1と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-5-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-5-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-5>
The resist composition (Re-5-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 1-1 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 4. The composition (Re-5-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-7>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-7-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順で10回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-7-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-7>
First, a circulation type filtration facility connecting the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-7-0) was subjected to 10 in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-7-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例1-8>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタを、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に6時間浸漬した。そして、浸漬後の第1のフィルタと浸漬後の第2のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-8-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタ順に通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-8-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-8>
First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 6 hours. Then, a filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-8-0) is passed through the liquid in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-8-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-9>
 まず、表4に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタを、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に12時間浸漬した。そして、浸漬後の第1のフィルタと浸漬後の第2のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-9-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順で8回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-9-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-9>
First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 4 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 12 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-9-0) was subjected to 8 in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-9-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例1-10>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表4に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例1-9と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-10-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-10-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-10>
The resist composition (Re-10-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 1-9, except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 4. The composition (Re-10-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-11>
 調製したレジスト組成物(Re-11-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、表4に示す第1のフィルタに通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-11-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-11>
The prepared resist composition (Re-11-0) was passed through the first filter shown in Table 4 under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. A resist composition (Re-11-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-12>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表4に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例1-11と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-12-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-12-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-12>
The resist composition (Re-12-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 1-11, except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 4. The composition (Re-12-1) was obtained.
<精製例1-13>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表4に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例1-1と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-13-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-13-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 1-13>
The resist composition (Re-13-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 1-1 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 4. The composition (Re-13-1) was obtained.
 以下に、表4を示す。 Table 4 is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000081
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000081
〔トップコート組成物の調製〕
 以下に、表5に示すトップコート組成物に含まれる各種成分を示す。
<樹脂>
 表5に示される樹脂としては、表2に示した樹脂PT-1~PT-3を用いた。
<添加剤>
 表5に示される添加剤の構造を以下に示す。
[Preparation of top coat composition]
The various components contained in the topcoat composition shown in Table 5 are shown below.
<Resin>
As the resin shown in Table 5, the resins PT-1 to PT-3 shown in Table 2 were used.
<Additives>
The structures of the additives shown in Table 5 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
<界面活性剤>
 表5に示される界面活性剤としては、上記界面活性剤H-3を用いた。
<Surfactant>
As the surfactant shown in Table 5, the above-mentioned surfactant H-3 was used.
<溶剤>
 表5に示される溶剤を以下に示す。
 FT-1:4-メチル-2-ペンタノール(MIBC)
 FT-2:n-デカン
 FT-3:ジイソアミルエーテル
<Solvent>
The solvents shown in Table 5 are shown below.
FT-1: 4-Methyl-2-pentanol (MIBC)
FT-2: n-decane FT-3: diisoamyl ether
<トップコート組成物の調製>
 表5に示した各成分を固形分濃度が3.0質量%となるように混合して、次いで、得られた混合液を、最初に孔径50nmのポリエチレン製フィルタ、次に孔径10nmのナイロン製フィルタ、最後に孔径5nmのポリエチレン製フィルタの順番で濾過することにより、トップコート組成物を調製した。なお、ここでいう固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を意味する。得られたトップコート組成物を、実施例で使用した。
<Preparation of top coat composition>
Each component shown in Table 5 was mixed so as to have a solid content concentration of 3.0% by mass, and then the obtained mixed solution was first made of a polyethylene filter having a pore size of 50 nm and then made of nylon having a pore size of 10 nm. A topcoat composition was prepared by filtering in the order of a filter and finally a polyethylene filter having a pore size of 5 nm. The solid content here means all components other than the solvent. The resulting topcoat composition was used in the examples.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000083
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000083
〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(1):ArF液浸露光、アルカリ水溶液現像〕
 シリコンウエハ上に有機反射防止膜形成用組成物ARC29SR(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚98nmの反射防止膜を形成した。その上に、表6に示すろ過後のレジスト組成物(ろ過後のレジスト組成物の組成については表3及び表4を参照。)を塗布し、100℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚90nmのレジスト膜(感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜)を形成した。なお、実施例1-2、及び実施例1-9については、レジスト膜の上層にトップコート膜を形成した(使用したトップコート組成物の組成については表5に示す)。トップコート膜の膜厚は、いずれにおいても100nmとした。
 レジスト膜に対して、ArFエキシマレーザー液浸スキャナー(ASML社製;XT1700i、NA1.20、Dipole、アウターシグマ0.950、インナーシグマ0.850、Y 偏光)を用いて、線幅45nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースパターンの6%ハーフトーンマスクを介して露光した。液浸液は、超純水を使用した。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド水溶液(2.38質量%)で30秒間現像し、次いで純水で30秒間リンスした。
[Pattern formation and defect evaluation (1): ArF immersion exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development]
The composition for forming an organic antireflection film ARC29SR (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form an antireflection film having a film thickness of 98 nm. The resist composition after filtration shown in Table 6 (see Tables 3 and 4 for the composition of the resist composition after filtration) is applied thereto, and the mixture is baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to have a film thickness of 90 nm. A resist film (active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film) was formed. In Examples 1-2 and 1-9, a topcoat film was formed on the upper layer of the resist film (the composition of the topcoat composition used is shown in Table 5). The film thickness of the top coat film was 100 nm in each case.
An ArF excimer laser immersion scanner (manufactured by ASML; XT1700i, NA1.20, Dipole, outer sigma 0.950, inner sigma 0.850, Y-polarized light) was used on the resist film at a line width of 45 nm 1: Exposure was performed through a 6% halftone mask with a 1-line and space pattern. Ultrapure water was used as the immersion liquid.
The resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with an aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (2.38% by mass) for 30 seconds, and then rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds.
<欠陥抑制性評価>
 得られたパターンウエハをApplied Materials社製欠陥評価装置UVision5で検査し、欠陥MAPを作成した。その後SEMVision G4(Applied Materials社製)を用いて欠陥の画像を取得し、シリコンウエハ1枚当たりの実欠陥数を算出した。なお、パターンウェハに生じた実欠陥は、例えば、図1及び図2のような画像として観察される。
 得られた実欠陥数を下記評価基準に従って評価した。欠陥数が少ないほど良好な結果を示す。評価結果を下記表6に示す。
 「S」:欠陥数が50個以下
 「A」:欠陥数が50個超200個以下
 「B」:欠陥数が200個超300個以下
 「C」:欠陥数が300個超400個以下
 「D」:欠陥数が400個超
<Evaluation of defect suppression>
The obtained pattern wafer was inspected with the defect evaluation device UVsion 5 manufactured by Applied Materials, and a defect MAP was prepared. After that, an image of defects was acquired using SEMVision G4 (manufactured by Applied Materials), and the actual number of defects per silicon wafer was calculated. The actual defects generated in the pattern wafer are observed as images as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, for example.
The actual number of defects obtained was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the number of defects, the better the result. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6 below.
"S": Number of defects is 50 or less "A": Number of defects is more than 50 and 200 or less "B": Number of defects is more than 200 and 300 or less "C": Number of defects is more than 300 and 400 or less " D ": The number of defects exceeds 400
〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(2):ArF液浸露光、有機溶剤現像〕
 現像液として酢酸n-ブチルを用いて30秒間パドルして現像し、次いで4-メチル-2-ペンタノールで30秒間リンスし、これをスピン乾燥して線幅45nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースのネガ型のパターンを形成した以外は、上述した〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(1):ArF液浸露光、アルカリ水溶液現像〕と同様の方法によりパターン形成及び欠陥数の評価を実施した。評価結果を下記表6に示す。
[Pattern formation and defect evaluation (2): ArF immersion exposure, organic solvent development]
It was developed by paddling with n-butyl acetate as a developer for 30 seconds, then rinsed with 4-methyl-2-pentanol for 30 seconds, and spin-dried to form a 1: 1 line and space with a line width of 45 nm. The pattern formation and the number of defects were evaluated by the same method as in the above-mentioned [Pattern formation and defect evaluation (1): ArF immersion exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development] except that a negative pattern was formed. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6 below.
 以下に表6を示す。
 表6中、「パターン形成方法」欄において「P」はアルカリ水溶液現像を表し、「N」は有機溶剤現像を表す。
Table 6 is shown below.
In Table 6, in the "pattern formation method" column, "P" represents alkaline aqueous solution development, and "N" represents organic solvent development.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000084
 表6の結果から、実施例のレジスト組成物の精製方法により得られるレジスト組成物を用いた場合、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性が優れていることが明らかである。
 また、表6の結果から、工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタXのうち、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmのフィルタであり、且つ、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmのフィルタである場合、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れていることが明らかである(実施例1-5以外が該当)。特に、精製方法が、下記精製方法T1であるか(実施例1-8が該当)、又は下記精製方法T2である場合(実施例1-7、実施例1-9、及び実施例1-10が該当)、好ましくは下記精製方法T3である場合(実施例1-9及び実施例1-10が該当)、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性が更に優れていることが明らかである。
 精製方法T1:工程X1(一回通液型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X1を実施する前に、工程X1で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
 精製方法T2:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含む精製方法。
 精製方法T3:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X2を実施する前に、工程X2で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
From the results in Table 6, it is clear that when the resist composition obtained by the method for purifying the resist composition of Examples is used, the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is excellent.
Further, from the results in Table 6, at least one of the filters X used in the step X is a filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm, and at least one of the filters X has a critical surface tension of 40. In the case of a filter of ~ 90 dyne / cm, it is clear that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is more excellent (except for Examples 1-5). In particular, when the purification method is the following purification method T1 (corresponding to Example 1-8) or the following purification method T2 (Examples 1-7, 1-9, and 1-10). Is applicable), preferably the following purification method T3 (corresponding to Examples 1-9 and 1-10), it is clear that the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is further excellent.
Purification method T1: A step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X1 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition, which comprises the step X1 (single flow type filtration step) and before the step X1 is carried out. Purification method to be carried out.
Purification method T2: A purification method including step X2 (circulation type filtration step).
Purification method T3: A step Y including step X2 (circulation type filtration step) and immersing the filter X used in step X2 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition is carried out before carrying out step X2. Purification method.
 一方、比較例の精製方法では、所望の要求を満たさないことは明らかである。
 なお、レジスト組成物Re-14-0について、上述した精製方法に準じて、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製してパターンを形成した場合と、1種のフィルターを用いて精製してパターンを形成した場合とで、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制能に差はほぼ観察されなかった。言い換えると、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製することによる改善はほぼ観察されなかった。
 これに対して、上述した通り、第1の光酸発生剤を含むレジスト組成物を用いた実施例の精製方法は、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製することによって欠陥抑制能を顕著に改善できた。
On the other hand, it is clear that the purification methods of Comparative Examples do not meet the desired requirements.
The resist composition Re-14-0 was purified using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions according to the above-mentioned purification method to form a pattern, and one type of filter was used. Almost no difference was observed in the defect suppressing ability of the formed pattern between the case of purifying and forming the pattern. In other words, almost no improvement was observed by purification using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other.
On the other hand, as described above, the purification method of the example using the resist composition containing the first photoacid generator suppresses defects by purifying using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other. The ability was significantly improved.
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の調製及び精製、パターン形成、及び欠陥評価:EUV露光]
〔EUV露光用の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の調製(2)〕
 表7に示した各成分を固形分濃度が2.0質量%となるように混合し、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下「レジスト組成物」ともいう)を調製した。なお、レジスト組成物において、固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を意味する。得られた樹脂組成物を、実施例及び比較例で使用した。
[Preparation and purification of actinic or radiation-sensitive resin compositions, pattern formation, and defect evaluation: EUV exposure]
[Preparation of Actinic Cheilitis or Radiation Sensitive Resin Composition for EUV Exposure (2)]
Each component shown in Table 7 was mixed so as to have a solid content concentration of 2.0% by mass to prepare an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”). In the resist composition, the solid content means all components other than the solvent. The obtained resin composition was used in Examples and Comparative Examples.
 なお、表7において、各成分の含有量(質量%)は、全固形分に対する含有量を意味する。 In Table 7, the content (mass%) of each component means the content with respect to the total solid content.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000085
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000085
〔EUV露光用の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製(2)〕
 得られた各レジスト組成物(Re-15-0~Re-30-0)に対して、以下に示す手順により、フィルタリングによるろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-15-1~Re-30-1)を得た。
[Purification of Actinic Cheilitis or Radiation Sensitive Resin Composition for EUV Exposure (2)]
Each of the obtained resist compositions (Re-15-0 to Re-30-0) was filtered by filtering according to the procedure shown below, and the resist compositions (Re-15-1 to Re-) were subjected to filtration treatment. 30-1) was obtained.
<各種フィルタ>
 以下に、まず、表8に示されるフィルタについて各々説明する。
 「Nylon」:
 支持部材に支持されたナイロン膜、臨界表面張力:77dyne/cm
 「PE」:
 支持部材に支持されたポリエチレン膜、臨界表面張力:36dyne/cm
 「PI」:
 ポリイミド膜単体、臨界表面張力:45dyne/cm
<Various filters>
First, each of the filters shown in Table 8 will be described below.
"Nylon":
Nylon film supported by a support member, critical surface tension: 77dyne / cm
"PE":
Polyethylene membrane supported by a support member, critical surface tension: 36 dyne / cm
"PI":
Polyimide film alone, critical surface tension: 45dyne / cm
<精製例2-1>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-15-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順に通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-15-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-1>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-15-0) is passed through the first filter to the second filter in this order under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-15-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-2>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-16-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第3のフィルタまで通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-16-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-2>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, and the third filter shown in Table 8 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-16-0) is passed from the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-16-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-3、2-6、2-12>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表8に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例2-2と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-17-0、Re-20-0、Re-26-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-17-1、Re-20-1、Re-26-1)を得た。
<Purification Examples 2-3, 2-6, 2-12>
The resist composition (Re-17-0, Re-20-0, Re-) was prepared in the same manner as in Purification Example 2-2 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 8. The filtration treatment of 26-0) was carried out to obtain a resist composition (Re-17-1, Re-20-1, Re-26-1).
<精製例2-4>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタと第4のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-18-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第4のフィルタまで通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-18-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-4>
First, a filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, the third filter, and the fourth filter shown in Table 8 are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-18-0) is passed from the first filter to the fourth filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-18-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-5、2-11>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表8に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例2-1と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-19-0、Re-25-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-19-1、Re-25-1)を得た。
<Purification Examples 2-5, 2-11>
Filtration of the resist composition (Re-19-0, Re-25-0) by the same method as in Purification Example 2-1 except that the type of the resist composition and the type of the filter were changed to those shown in Table 8. The treatment was carried out to obtain a resist composition (Re-19-1, Re-25-1).
<精製例2-7>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-21-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順で6回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-21-1)を得た。
<Purification example 2-7>
First, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 are connected was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-21-0) was applied to the prepared resist composition (Re-21-0) in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. 6 The resist composition (Re-21-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例2-8>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタを、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に10時間浸漬した。そして、浸漬後の第1のフィルタと浸漬後の第2のフィルタとを直列に繋いだろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-22-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタ順に通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-22-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-8>
First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 10 hours. Then, a filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected in series was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-22-0) is passed through the liquid in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. As a result, a resist composition (Re-22-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-9>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタを、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に18時間浸漬した。そして、浸漬後の第1のフィルタと浸漬後の第2のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-23-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第2のフィルタの順で10回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-23-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-9>
First, the first filter and the second filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 18 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion and the second filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, 10 of the prepared resist composition (Re-23-0) was applied in the order of the first filter to the second filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-23-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例2-10>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタを、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)に10時間浸漬した。そして、浸漬後の第1のフィルタと浸漬後の第2のフィルタと浸漬後の第3のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-24-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第3のフィルタの順で4回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-24-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-10>
First, the first filter, the second filter and the third filter shown in Table 8 were immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 23 ° C. for 10 hours. Then, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter after immersion, the second filter after immersion, and the third filter after immersion are connected is prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-24-0) was subjected to 4 in the order of the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-24-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例2-13>
 まず、表8に示す第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタと第3のフィルタとを繋いだ循環型のろ過設備を準備した。次いで、調製したレジスト組成物(Re-27-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、第1のフィルタから第3のフィルタの順で12回循環させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-27-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-13>
First, a circulation type filtration facility in which the first filter, the second filter, and the third filter shown in Table 8 are connected was prepared. Next, the prepared resist composition (Re-27-0) was subjected to 12 in the order of the first filter to the third filter under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. The resist composition (Re-27-1) was obtained by circulating the mixture.
<精製例2-14>
 調製したレジスト組成物(Re-28-0)を、23℃の環境下、線速度40L/(hr・m)の条件にて、表8に示す第1のフィルタに通液させることで、レジスト組成物(Re-28-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-14>
The prepared resist composition (Re-28-0) was passed through the first filter shown in Table 8 under the condition of a linear velocity of 40 L / (hr · m 2 ) in an environment of 23 ° C. A resist composition (Re-28-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-15>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表8に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例2-16と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-29-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-29-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-15>
The resist composition (Re-29-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 2-16 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 8. The composition (Re-29-1) was obtained.
<精製例2-16>
 レジスト組成物の種類及びフィルタの種類を表8に記載のものに変更した以外は、精製例2-1と同様の方法によりレジスト組成物(Re-30-0)のろ過処理を実施し、レジスト組成物(Re-30-1)を得た。
<Purification Example 2-16>
The resist composition (Re-30-0) was filtered by the same method as in Purification Example 2-1 except that the type of resist composition and the type of filter were changed to those shown in Table 8. The composition (Re-30-1) was obtained.
 以下に、表8を示す。 Table 8 is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000086
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000086
〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(3):EUV露光、アルカリ水溶液現像〕
 シリコンウエハ上に下層膜形成用組成物AL412(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚20nmの下地膜を形成した。その上に、表9に示すろ過後のレジスト組成物(ろ過後のレジスト組成物の組成については表7及び表8を参照。)を塗布し、100℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚30nmのレジスト膜を形成した。
 EUV露光装置(Exitech社製、Micro Exposure Tool、NA0.3、Quadrupol、アウターシグマ0.68、インナーシグマ0.36)を用いて、得られたレジスト膜を有するシリコンウエハに対してパターン照射を行った。なお、レクチルとしては、ラインサイズ=20nmであり、且つ、ライン:スペース=1:1であるマスクを用いた。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド水溶液(2.38質量%)で30秒間現像し、次いで純水で30秒間リンスした。
[Pattern formation and defect evaluation (3): EUV exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development]
The underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm. The resist composition after filtration shown in Table 9 (see Tables 7 and 8 for the composition of the resist composition after filtration) is applied thereto, and the mixture is baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to have a film thickness of 30 nm. A resist film was formed.
Using an EUV exposure device (Micro Exposure Tool, NA0.3, Quadrupole, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36) manufactured by Exitech, pattern irradiation was performed on the silicon wafer having the obtained resist film. It was. As the reticulum, a mask having a line size of 20 nm and a line: space = 1: 1 was used.
The resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with an aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (2.38% by mass) for 30 seconds, and then rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds.
<欠陥抑制性評価>
 得られたパターンウエハをApplied Materials社製欠陥評価装置UVision5で検査し、欠陥MAPを作成した。その後SEMVision G4(Applied Materials社製)を用いて欠陥の画像を取得し、シリコンウエハ1枚当たりの実欠陥数を算出した。なお、パターンウェハに生じた実欠陥は、例えば、図1及び図2のような画像として観察される。
 得られた実欠陥数を下記評価基準に従って評価した。欠陥数が少ないほど良好な結果を示す。評価結果を下記表9に示す。
 「S」:欠陥数が50個以下
 「A」:欠陥数が50個超200個以下
 「B」:欠陥数が200個超300個以下
 「C」:欠陥数が300個超400個以下
 「D」:欠陥数が400超
<Evaluation of defect suppression>
The obtained pattern wafer was inspected with the defect evaluation device UVsion 5 manufactured by Applied Materials, and a defect MAP was prepared. After that, an image of defects was acquired using SEMVision G4 (manufactured by Applied Materials), and the actual number of defects per silicon wafer was calculated. The actual defects generated in the pattern wafer are observed as images as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, for example.
The actual number of defects obtained was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the number of defects, the better the result. The evaluation results are shown in Table 9 below.
"S": Number of defects is 50 or less "A": Number of defects is more than 50 and 200 or less "B": Number of defects is more than 200 and less than 300 "C": Number of defects is more than 300 and 400 or less " D ": The number of defects exceeds 400
〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(4):EUV露光、有機溶剤現像〕
 現像液として酢酸n-ブチルを用いて30秒間パドルして現像し、次いでスピン乾燥してピッチ40nm、ライン幅20nm(スペース幅20nm)のラインアンドスペースのネガ型のパターンを形成した以外は、上述した〔パターン形成及び欠陥評価(3):EUV露光、アルカリ水溶液現像〕と同様の方法によりパターン形成及び欠陥数の評価を実施した。評価結果を下記表9に示す。
[Pattern formation and defect evaluation (4): EUV exposure, organic solvent development]
Above, except that n-butyl acetate was used as a developer for 30 seconds to develop, and then spin-dried to form a line-and-space negative pattern with a pitch of 40 nm and a line width of 20 nm (space width of 20 nm). Pattern formation and defect number evaluation were carried out by the same method as in [Pattern formation and defect evaluation (3): EUV exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development]. The evaluation results are shown in Table 9 below.
 以下に表9を示す。
 表9中、「パターン形成方法」欄において「P」はアルカリ水溶液現像を表し、「N」は有機溶剤現像を表す。
Table 9 is shown below.
In Table 9, in the "pattern formation method" column, "P" represents alkaline aqueous solution development, and "N" represents organic solvent development.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000087
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000087
 表9の結果から、実施例のレジスト組成物の精製方法により得られるレジスト組成物を用いた場合、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性が優れていることが明らかである。
 また、表9の結果から、工程Xにおいて使用されるフィルタのうち、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmのフィルタであり、且つ、少なくとも1種以上が臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmのフィルタである場合(実施例2-5以外)、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性がより優れていることが明らかである。特に、精製方法が、下記精製方法T1であるか(実施例2-8が該当)、又は下記精製方法T2である場合(実施例2-7、実施例2-9、実施例2-10、及び実施例2-13が該当)、好ましくは下記精製方法T3である場合(実施例2-9及び実施例2-10が該当)、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制性が更に優れていることが明らかである。
 精製方法T1:工程X1(一回通液型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X1を実施する前に、工程X1で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
 精製方法T2:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含む精製方法。
 精製方法T3:工程X2(循環型ろ過工程)を含み、且つ工程X2を実施する前に、工程X2で使用されるフィルタXをレジスト組成物に含まれる有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを実施する、精製方法。
From the results in Table 9, it is clear that when the resist composition obtained by the method for purifying the resist composition of Examples is used, the defect suppressing property of the formed pattern is excellent.
Further, from the results in Table 9, at least one of the filters used in step X is a filter having a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 din / cm, and at least one of the filters has a critical surface tension of 40 to 40 to. In the case of a 90 yne / cm filter (other than Examples 2-5), it is clear that the defect suppression property of the formed pattern is better. In particular, when the purification method is the following purification method T1 (corresponding to Example 2-8) or the following purification method T2 (Example 2-7, Example 2-9, Example 2-10, And Example 2-13), preferably the following purification method T3 (Applicable to Examples 2-9 and 2-10), the defect suppression property of the formed pattern is further excellent. it is obvious.
Purification method T1: A step Y of immersing the filter X used in the step X1 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition, which comprises the step X1 (single flow type filtration step) and before the step X1 is carried out. Purification method to be carried out.
Purification method T2: A purification method including step X2 (circulation type filtration step).
Purification method T3: A step Y including step X2 (circulation type filtration step) and immersing the filter X used in step X2 in the organic solvent contained in the resist composition is carried out before carrying out step X2. Purification method.
 一方、比較例の精製方法では、所望の要求を満たさないことは明らかである。
 なお、レジスト組成物Re-31-0について、上述した精製方法に準じて、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製してパターンを形成した場合と、1種のフィルターを用いて精製してパターンを形成した場合とで、形成されるパターンの欠陥抑制能に差はほぼ観察されなかった。言い換えると、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製することによる改善はほぼ観察されなかった。
 これに対して、上述した通り、第1の光酸発生剤を含むレジスト組成物を用いた実施例の精製方法は、互いに臨界表面張力の異なる2種のフィルターを用いて精製することによって欠陥抑制能を顕著に改善できた。
On the other hand, it is clear that the purification methods of Comparative Examples do not meet the desired requirements.
The resist composition Re-31-0 is purified using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions to form a pattern according to the above-mentioned purification method, and one type of filter is used. Almost no difference was observed in the defect suppressing ability of the formed pattern between the case of purifying and forming the pattern. In other words, almost no improvement was observed by purification using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other.
On the other hand, as described above, the purification method of the example using the resist composition containing the first photoacid generator suppresses defects by purifying using two types of filters having different critical surface tensions from each other. The ability was significantly improved.

Claims (9)

  1.  酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂と、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物と、溶剤と、を少なくとも含む感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法であり、
     前記活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する化合物が、下記化合物(I)~下記化合物(III)からなる群より選ばれる1種以上の化合物を含み、
     前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を2種以上のフィルタに通過させてろ過する工程Xを含む、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
     化合物(I):下記構造部位Xと下記構造部位Yとを各々1つずつ有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、下記構造部位Xに由来する下記第1の酸性部位と下記構造部位Yに由来する下記第2の酸性部位とを含む酸を発生する化合物
      構造部位X:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によってHAで表される第1の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
      構造部位Y:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、前記構造部位Xにて形成される前記第1の酸性部位とは異なる構造のHAで表される第2の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
     但し、化合物(I)は、下記条件Iを満たす。
     条件I:前記化合物(I)において前記構造部位X中の前記カチオン部位M 及び前記構造部位Y中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIが、前記構造部位X中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1と、前記構造部位Y中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2を有し、且つ、前記酸解離定数a1よりも前記酸解離定数a2の方が大きい。
     化合物(II):前記構造部位Xを2つ以上と前記構造部位Yとを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、前記構造部位Xに由来する前記第1の酸性部位を2つ以上と前記構造部位Yに由来する前記第2の酸性部位とを含む酸を発生する化合物
     但し、化合物(II)は、下記条件IIを満たす。
     条件II:前記化合物(II)において前記構造部位X中の前記カチオン部位M 及び前記構造部位Y中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIが、前記構造部位X中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1と、前記構造部位Y中の前記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2を有し、且つ、前記酸解離定数a1よりも前記酸解離定数a2の方が大きい。
     化合物(III):前記構造部位Xを2つ以上と、下記構造部位Zとを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、前記構造部位Xに由来する前記第1の酸性部位を2つ以上と前記構造部位Zとを含む酸を発生する化合物
     構造部位Z:酸を中和可能な非イオン性の部位
    A method for purifying a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing at least a resin whose polarity is increased by the action of an acid, a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation, and a solvent.
    The compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of the following compounds (I) to the following compounds (III).
    A method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition, which comprises step X in which the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition is passed through two or more types of filters and filtered.
    Compound (I): A compound having one of the following structural sites X and one of the following structural sites Y, and the following first acidic site and the following structure derived from the following structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation. compound structure sites of generating an acid comprising the following second acidic site derived from the site Y X: anionic part a 1 - consists of a cationic sites M 1 + and Table in HA 1 by and exposed to actinic rays or radiation the first structural portion structural site to form an acidic site Y that is: anionic part a 2 - consists of a cationic sites M 2 + and, and by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, the formed by the structural moiety X The structural site forming the second acidic site represented by HA 2 having a structure different from that of the first acidic site. However, the compound (I) satisfies the following condition I.
    Condition I: In the compound (I), the compound PI obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + is contained in the structural site X. The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 , which is obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + with H + , and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y are replaced with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from an acidic moiety represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
    Compound (II): A compound having two or more structural sites X and the structural site Y, and having two first acidic sites derived from the structural site X by irradiation with active light or radiation. A compound that generates an acid containing the above and the second acidic moiety derived from the structural moiety Y. However, the compound (II) satisfies the following condition II.
    Condition II: In the compound (II), the compound PII obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + is contained in the structural site X. The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 , which is obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + with H + , and the cation site M 2 + in the structural site Y are replaced with H +. It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from an acidic moiety represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
    Compound (III): A compound having two or more of the structural site X and the following structural site Z, wherein the first acidic site derived from the structural site X is 2 by irradiation with active light or radiation. A compound that generates an acid containing one or more of the structural site Z Structural site Z: A nonionic site capable of neutralizing the acid
  2.  前記フィルタの臨界表面張力が10~90dyne/cmである、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。 The method for purifying a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the critical surface tension of the filter is 10 to 90 dyne / cm.
  3.  前記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が、40~90dyne/cmである、請求項1又は2に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。 The method for purifying an actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the critical surface tension of at least one of the filters is 40 to 90 dyne / cm.
  4.  前記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が40~90dyne/cmであり、前記フィルタのうちの少なくとも1種の臨界表面張力が10~39dyne/cmである、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。 Any of claims 1 to 3, wherein at least one of the filters has a critical surface tension of 40 to 90 dyne / cm and at least one of the filters has a critical surface tension of 10 to 39 dyne / cm. The method for purifying a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to item 1.
  5.  前記工程Xが、流路に配置された2種以上のフィルタに前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を通過させてろ過した後、前記フィルタを通過した前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を更に同じフィルタに導いて再度ろ過を行う工程X2である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。 In the step X, the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition is passed through two or more types of filters arranged in the flow path to filter, and then the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive radiation that has passed through the filter. The method for purifying an actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which is a step X2 in which the sex resin composition is further guided to the same filter and filtered again.
  6.  前記工程Xの前に、前記工程Xにて使用される前記フィルタを有機溶剤に浸漬する工程Yを有する、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。 The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a step Y of immersing the filter used in the step X in an organic solvent before the step X. Method for purifying the composition.
  7.  前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物が有機溶剤を含み、
     前記フィルタを浸漬する有機溶剤と、前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤とが同じ種類である、請求項6に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法。
    The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition contains an organic solvent and contains
    The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 6, wherein the organic solvent for immersing the filter and the organic solvent contained in the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition are of the same type. Purification method.
  8.  請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物の精製方法により、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を精製する工程と、
     前記精製された感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて、支持体上にレジスト膜を形成する工程と、
     前記レジスト膜を露光する工程と、
     前記露光されたレジスト膜を、現像液を用いて現像する工程と、を有する、パターン形成方法。
    A step of purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition by the method for purifying the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
    A step of forming a resist film on a support using the purified actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and
    The step of exposing the resist film and
    A pattern forming method comprising a step of developing the exposed resist film with a developing solution.
  9.  請求項8に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the pattern forming method according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2020/023711 2019-06-28 2020-06-17 Purification method for actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device WO2020262134A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021526829A JP7239695B2 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-06-17 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition purification method, pattern formation method, electronic device production method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-122354 2019-06-28
JP2019122354 2019-06-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020262134A1 true WO2020262134A1 (en) 2020-12-30

Family

ID=74060287

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/023711 WO2020262134A1 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-06-17 Purification method for actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7239695B2 (en)
TW (1) TW202104144A (en)
WO (1) WO2020262134A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022209733A1 (en) 2021-03-29 2022-10-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010164980A (en) * 2002-12-19 2010-07-29 Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd Process for producing photoresist composition, filter, and coater
JP2014149409A (en) * 2013-01-31 2014-08-21 Fujifilm Corp Pattern forming method, compound, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition and resist film used for the method, method for manufacturing electronic device, and electronic device
JP2015024989A (en) * 2013-06-17 2015-02-05 住友化学株式会社 Salt, acid generator, resist composition, and method for producing resist pattern
WO2019013155A1 (en) * 2017-07-10 2019-01-17 富士フイルム株式会社 Filter unit, refining device, manufacturing device, and chemical

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010164980A (en) * 2002-12-19 2010-07-29 Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd Process for producing photoresist composition, filter, and coater
JP2014149409A (en) * 2013-01-31 2014-08-21 Fujifilm Corp Pattern forming method, compound, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition and resist film used for the method, method for manufacturing electronic device, and electronic device
JP2015024989A (en) * 2013-06-17 2015-02-05 住友化学株式会社 Salt, acid generator, resist composition, and method for producing resist pattern
WO2019013155A1 (en) * 2017-07-10 2019-01-17 富士フイルム株式会社 Filter unit, refining device, manufacturing device, and chemical

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022209733A1 (en) 2021-03-29 2022-10-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202104144A (en) 2021-02-01
JP7239695B2 (en) 2023-03-14
JPWO2020262134A1 (en) 2020-12-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102603920B1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2020158313A1 (en) Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2020004306A1 (en) Active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method, resin
JP2023145543A (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, resist film, and electronic device manufacturing method
KR102634581B1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7313443B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7221308B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2020261753A1 (en) Active-light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, method for manufacturing electronic device, and composition-accommodating body
WO2020261752A1 (en) Method for producing active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2021039252A1 (en) Active-light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, method for manufacturing electronic device, compound, and resin
WO2020262134A1 (en) Purification method for actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device
WO2020241099A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
WO2020255585A1 (en) Method for purifying compound that generates acid when irradiated with active light or radiation, method for producing active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2020158467A1 (en) Active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, method for forming pattern, and method for manufacturing electronic device
TWI836094B (en) Photosensitive radiation or radiation-sensitive resin composition, photoresist film, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20832057

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021526829

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20832057

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1